Samsung SGH I717ZBAATT User Manual

M O B I L E  
P H O N E  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
phone, and keep it for future reference.  
®
®
Nuance , VSuite, T9 Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its  
affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
®
The Bluetooth word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered  
trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
®
Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.  
and  
are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license from  
SRS Labs, Inc.  
TM  
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)  
movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information  
on how to complete your registration.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Apps, Google Calendar, Google Checkout,  
Google Earth, Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2012 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make any  
modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is required on all  
voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices or plans may require you  
to subscribe to a data plan.  
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be aware that  
some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available through AT&T, AT&T  
offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other phones on your account.  
However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the terms and conditions and the  
associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be used and protected.  
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or  
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These controls may  
not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.  
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to improve  
its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy  
.
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to hear and be heard  
in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your voice and  
suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.  
How Does It Work?  
The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.  
Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise - from both  
ends of a call.  
It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.  
With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls, without  
worrying about surrounding noise.  
Open Source Software  
This product includes certain free/open source software. The exact terms of the licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and notices are  
available on the Samsung's website http://opensource.samsung.com  
.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability  
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE  
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER  
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE  
WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE  
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION  
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE  
PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF  
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR  
YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.  
Table of Contents  
1
2
3
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for  
4
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section explains how to start using your phone by first  
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then  
setting up your Voicemail.  
2. Lift the cover up and away from the phone (2).  
Setting Up Your Phone  
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM into  
their corresponding internal compartments. The microSD™ card  
slot is also located in this same internal area.  
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into the  
slot on the top side of your phone (1).  
Installing the SIM Card  
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided with  
a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details, such as  
your PIN, available optional services, and many others features.  
Important!: The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts can be easily  
damaged by scratching or bending, so be careful when handling,  
inserting, or removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach  
of small children.  
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket (as  
shown) until the card locks into place.  
5
           
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone and  
that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned as shown.  
Note: Your phone has been tested to support up to a 32GB memory card.  
1. Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as  
shown).  
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and the  
card is securely inserted.  
Incorrect  
Incorrect  
Correct  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not detect the SIM  
card. Re-orient the card back into the slot if the SIM is not detected.  
Installing and Removing the Memory Card  
Correct  
2. To remove, push on the memory card until it clicks and is  
released. Then grasp the memory card and remove it from  
the phone.  
Your device lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHCcard  
to expand available memory space. This secure digital card  
enables you to exchange images, music, and data between  
SD-compatible devices. This type of memory card is designed for  
use with this mobile phone and other devices.  
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card” on  
Getting Started  
6
         
Installing the Battery  
Installing the Back Cover  
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the  
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).  
1. Place the battery cover onto the back bottom of the phone  
(1) and press down (2).  
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).  
7
 
2. Press all along the edge of the back cover until you have a  
Although you can use the phone while the battery is charging,  
doing so will require additional charging time.  
secure seal.  
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your phone for the first  
time. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately 4 hours.  
Using the Travel Charger  
Important!: Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to connection. If  
the battery is not properly installed and the wall charger is  
connected, the handset may power off and on continuously,  
preventing proper operation.  
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before switching on the  
phone.  
Incorrect  
Charging a Battery  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The  
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included with  
your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and chargers.  
Correct  
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate mode, web  
browser use, and other variables may reduce the battery’s talk and  
standby times.  
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/  
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a  
standard AC wall outlet.  
Getting Started  
8
       
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from the  
Switching the Phone On or Off  
interface connector jack on the phone.  
1. Press and hold  
(on the upper right side of the  
phone) until the phone switches on.  
Warning!: If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a  
touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your  
finger. Using excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on  
the touch screen may damage the tempered glass surface and  
2. Sweep your finger across the screen to unlock the phone.  
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the  
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery, can  
cause damage to the phone.  
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold  
, until  
the Phone options screen displays.  
Low Battery Indicator  
4. Tap Power off, then tap OK to switch off the phone.  
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time  
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a  
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your phone  
conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning off the  
backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a quick check  
of your battery level, glance at the battery charge indicator  
located in the upper-right corner of your device’s display. Solid  
color ( ) indicates a full charge.  
Locking and Unlocking the Touch Screen  
1. When the phone is turned on, press  
to lock  
the touch screen.  
2. To unlock your phone, press  
to display the  
lock screen then sweep your finger across the screen in  
any direction to unlock the phone as shown.  
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically  
turns off.  
9
               
2. Read and follow the instructions on each screen.  
3. Throughout the Ready2Go Setup Wizard you can do the  
following:  
Touch Next to view the next screen.  
Touch Back to re-display the previous screen.  
Press  
to exit the Ready2Go Setup Wizard and return to the  
Home screen.  
Creating a New Google Account  
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will need  
to create a Google™ Account when you first use your device.  
With a Google Account, Google applications will always be in  
sync between your phone and computer.  
Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go  
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your  
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up  
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi  
and many more features.  
After you start your phone for the first time, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Applications  
Gmail  
.
1. When the Fast & Easy Phone Set-Up screen displays, touch  
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
Get Started to begin.  
2. Tap Next to continue.  
– or –  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Google  
Touch Cancel to set up your phone later. You can access  
Account.  
Ready2Go by tapping Applications  
AT&T Ready2Go  
.
Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.  
Getting Started  
10  
         
Accessing Your Voice Mail  
Resetting your Google Account Password  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then touch and hold  
A Google account password is required for Google applications. If  
you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow  
these instructions to reset it:  
.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice  
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser to navigate  
mail center.  
to http://google.com/accounts  
.
Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. Once the URL loads, click on the Can’t access your  
account? link.  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk  
3. Enter your Email address and click Submit  
.
key on the phone you are using.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset your password.  
3. Enter your passcode.  
Setting Up Your Voicemail  
Android System Recovery  
Android System Recovery is used for Google updates but the  
average user will never need to perform a system recovery.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then touch and hold  
.
You may be prompted to enter a password.  
Note: If you entered this menu by mistake, use the Volume Up/Down keys to  
select reboot system now, then press the Power key. Your phone will  
then continue to boot up.  
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a greeting,  
and record your name.  
To enter the Android System Recovery mode, follow these steps:  
1. With the phone turned off, press the Power key and  
Volume Up/Down keys at the same time until the phone  
switches on.  
Note: These steps may be different depending on your network.  
11  
               
2. Once the Samsung logo appears, release the Power key  
1. Make sure your phone is turned off.  
while continuing to press the Volume Up/Down keys.  
2. Press and hold the power key (  
) to boot up  
3. Continue to press the Volume Up/Down keys for at least 8  
seconds, until Recovery mode is launched and the Android  
System Recovery screen is displayed.  
your device.  
3. After the start-up animation begins to display, rapidly tap  
the key until the Lock screen displays.  
4. Release the Volume Up/Down keys.  
5. The following options are available:  
• reboot system now: this option turns on your phone.  
When the Lock screen is displayed, Safe mode is displayed  
in the lower left corner of the screen.  
Troubleshooting  
If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may  
need to reset the device to regain functionality.  
• apply update from sdcard: this option allows you to apply updates  
from your memory card to your phone.  
• wipe data/factory reset: deletes all data from the phone except  
If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold  
the Power/Lock Key for 8 to 10 seconds.  
• wipe cache partition: allows you to delete all cache data such as  
log files.  
6. Use the Volume Up/Down keys to scroll up or down, then  
use the Home key  
to make a selection.  
Safe Mode  
You can boot your phone into Safe Mode if you wish to  
troubleshoot whether or not added applications are causing  
problems with the device. Safe mode will only load basic system  
software.  
Getting Started  
12  
     
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone  
This section outlines some key features of your phone and  
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone  
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and  
provides information on using a memory card.  
Front View of Your Phone  
12  
11  
10  
1
Features of Your Phone  
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many useful  
features. The following list outlines a few of the features included  
in your phone.  
4G LTE network with 1.5 gigahertz dual core processor  
Android Gingerbread platform  
9
8
S Memo and S Pen apps provide free-flowing input techniques  
Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone menus  
and options including applications and seven home screens  
Ready access to the Internet  
2
3
Built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi technology  
Brilliant 5.3” wide-screen SAMOLED™ HD display  
8 Megapixel camera and camcorder  
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation  
HSDPA 21 mbps high speed download capability  
microSD card compatibility with up to 32GB expandable memory slot  
Sync and update social network applications  
4
5
6
7
13  
             
1. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller.  
8. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is  
presently displayed.  
2. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your  
favorite applications on the Home screen.  
9. AccuWeather Widget: displays a five-day forecast for any  
city you select along with weather and conditions. Tap the  
widget to set up the weather for a desired city or your  
current location.  
3. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important  
features such as Phone, Calendar, Email, Web, and  
10. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to operate  
your phone, such as the received signal strength, phone  
battery level, time, unread Emails, missed calls, time,  
date, etc.  
4. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with  
additional options for different features and applications  
such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts, Messaging, and  
Web.  
11. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of yourself  
when you set the camera shooting mode to Self shot.  
5. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home screen  
from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold to display  
your recently used applications and a shortcut to the Task  
Manager.  
12. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light level to  
adjust keypad access. If the light path is blocked, for  
example, when holding the phone close to your ear, the  
touch screen will turn off. Also used for some Camera  
settings.  
6. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating a  
menu or web page.  
7. Search key: allows you to access the Google Search  
feature where you can search for items on the internet.  
Understanding Your Phone  
14  
1. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume while in  
standby mode or adjust the voice volume during a call.  
When receiving an incoming call, briefly press down either  
Side Views of Your Phone  
5
4
volume key (  
) to mute the ring tone.  
1
2. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to  
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories  
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for  
convenient, hands-free conversations.  
3. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you are  
speaking to them.  
4. Power/Lock key: (  
) lets you power your  
phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the  
touch screen. For more information on locking your phone,  
2
3
Left Side Right Side  
5. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.  
15  
     
Rear View of Your Phone  
S Pen  
The S Pen is a stylus that assists you in performing different  
functions. By using the Pen button, you can minimize having to  
switch between touch and pen input.  
1
2
1
2
3
4
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.  
1. Pen button: by pressing the Pen button, you can add  
functionality to the S Pen. For more information, refer to  
2. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking  
pictures in dark places.  
3. External speaker: allows you to hear when the  
2. Stylus tip: the tip of the S Pen is used for tapping the  
Speakerphone is turned on.  
screen.  
4. S Pen: a built-in stylus that allows you to perform various  
Understanding Your Phone  
16  
       
Removing the S Pen from your Phone  
Using the S Pen  
The S Pen is stored in your phone to make it easier to keep track  
of.  
There are several different functions you can perform by using  
the S Pen.  
Back Button  
To remove the S Pen, follow these steps:  
1. Use your fingernail or a sharp object to pull the end of the S  
Pen out of the phone (1).  
To move to a previous screen, hold the S Pen button and touch  
and drag the screen to the left. The previous screen is displayed.  
Press S Pen button  
2. Pull the S Pen out of the phone (2).  
17  
 
Menu Button  
To display the menu from any screen, hold the S Pen button and  
touch and drag the screen upward. The menu is displayed.  
Press S Pen button  
Screen Capture  
To take a screen capture, hold the S Pen button and press and  
hold the S Pen anywhere on the screen. Files are saved in the  
Press S Pen button  
Launch S Memo Lite  
My Files  
ScreenCapture folder.  
S Memo Lite is an application that you can launch from any  
screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas. To open S Memo  
Lite, hold the S Pen button and double-tap the screen.  
Understanding Your Phone  
18  
Write on any Screen after Capture  
Display Layout  
To write on a screen capture, use the pen to draw or write. Files  
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about the  
phone’s status and options, as well as providing access to  
are saved in the My Files  
ScreenCapture folder.  
Primary Shortcuts  
There are four non-movable Application Shortcuts that appear at  
the bottom of all Home screens. The default shortcuts are:  
Phone  
for dialing a number. For more information, refer to  
Calendar  
for recording events and appointments to  
For information on using your S Pen with the S Memo application,  
Email  
for sending and receiving email from your device. For more  
Applications  
for accessing the applications on your phone. For  
While viewing the Applications Menu, the Application shortcut  
changes to Home , which returns you to the Main screen.  
You can change the Phone, Email, and Browser application  
shortcuts to any icon that is displayed in the Applications menu.  
19  
     
Displays when a call is on hold.  
Indicator Icons  
Displays when the speakerphone is on.  
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display  
and Indicator area:  
Displays when a call has been missed.  
Displays when a call has been muted.  
Displays your current signal strength. The greater the  
number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You cannot  
send or receive any calls or access online information.  
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.  
Displays when there is no network available.  
Displays when there is a system error or alert.  
Displays when a call is in progress.  
Displays when Call forwardingis set toAlways forward.  
Displays when you phone is set to automatically reject  
all calls.  
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is fully  
charged.  
Displays when your battery is charging. Also displays  
battery charge level.  
Displays when a call is in progress using a Bluetooth  
device.  
Understanding Your Phone  
20  
 
Device Power Critical – Shows your current battery  
only has three percent power remaining and will  
immediately shutdown.  
Displays when updates are available for download.  
Displays when an external microSD memory card is  
full.  
Displays when your connection to an EDGE network is  
active.  
Displays when the phone is connected to a computer  
via a supported USB cable connection.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with the  
EDGE network.  
Displays when the phone is tethered via a supported  
USB cable connection.  
Displays when your connection to a UTMS, HSDPA,  
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.  
Displays when a new text or multimedia message is  
received.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with the  
UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.  
Displays when a new Voicemail is received.  
Displays when your connection to a 4G LTE network is  
active.  
Displays when Email is received.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with the  
4G LTE network.  
Displays when a new gmail message is received.  
Displays when your phone is downloading a file.  
Displays as a reminder to configure your phone using  
the AT&T Ready2Go application or to setup your  
Google Account.  
Displays when a Market download has successfully  
been installed.  
21  
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event  
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and your phone is  
connected to another device.  
Displays when your phone is connected to a PC using  
Kies air.  
Displays when you set an alarm to ring at a specified  
Displays when your phone is connected to a Digital  
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device using  
the AllShare application.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent mode.  
Displays when your phone as been configured as a  
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent mode  
and Vibrate is set to Always or Only in silent mode.  
Displays when GPS is active and acquiring a signal.  
Displays when Power saving mode is enabled.  
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.  
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.  
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired  
with the phone.  
Displays when Bluetooth is on but is not connected  
to a Bluetooth device.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a  
communication issue with the target Wireless Access  
Point (WAP).  
Understanding Your Phone  
22  
Application Icons  
Amazon Kindle: This application allows you to download  
books,magazines,andnewspaperstoreadonyourphone.  
The Application menu provides quick access to the items you use  
most frequently.  
The following table contains a description of each application. If  
the application is already described in another section of this  
user manual, then a cross reference to that particular section is  
provided.  
AT&TCodeScanner:AT&TCodeScannerallowsyoutoscan  
2D (QR and datamatrix codes) and 1D (UPC and EAN)  
barcodesfoundinmagazines,stores,andonline.Formore  
For information on navigating through the Applications icons, see  
AT&T FamilyMap: provides peace of mind by being able to  
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless  
phone or PC and know that your family's location  
information is secure and private. For more information,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap one of the  
application icons.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3. To return to the Home screen, tap  
The following applications are available:  
.
AT&T Navigator: AT&T Navigator provides you with access  
toreal-timeGPS-drivenapplications. Theseprogramsnot  
onlyallowyoutoachieveturn-by-turnnavigation, butalso  
access local searches based on a variety of category  
AllShare: AllShare allows your phone to stream photos,  
music and videos from its memory to other Digital Living  
NetworkAlliance(DLNA)certifieddevices.Yourphonecan  
also play digital content streamed from other DLNA  
23  
 
AT&TReady2Go:AT&TReady2Goallowsyoutoquicklyand  
easily setup your phone by using the web browser on your  
PC. You can set-up email accounts, import contacts, set  
wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi and many more features. For  
Contacts: You can manage your daily contacts by storing  
their name and number in your Address Book. Address  
Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group. For  
Crayon Physics: Crayon Physics is a game the uses two-  
dimensional physics, including gravity, mass, kinetic  
energy and transfer of momentum. For more information,  
Books: With Google Books, you can find more than 3  
million free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to  
Downloads: The Downloads application allows you to  
manage all of your downloads from the Market and the  
Calculator: Using this feature you can use the phone as a  
calculator. The calculator provides the basic arithmetic  
functions; addition, subtraction, multiplication, and  
division.Youcanalsousethisasascientificcalculator. For  
Facebook: Facebook enables you to go directly to your  
Facebook account without accessing it through your web  
Camera: Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to  
produce photos in a JPEG format. For more information,  
Featured Apps: The Featured Apps application allows you  
to see the latest featured applications available on the  
Clock: The Clock application allows you to access alarms,  
view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a timer, and  
Understanding Your Phone  
24  
   
Gallery:TheGalleryiswhereyouviewphotosandplayback  
videos. For photos, you can also perform basic editing  
tasks,viewaslideshow,setphotosaswallpaperorcontact  
image, and share as a picture message. For more  
Latitude: With Google Latitude, you can see the location of  
allofyourfriendsonamaporonalist.Youcanalsoshareor  
Live TV: Live TV is a subscription service that allows you to  
watchyourfavoriteTVshowsusingyourhandset.Formore  
Gmail: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is  
configuredwhenyoufirstsetupyourphone.Dependingon  
your synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically  
synchronizewithyourGmailaccountontheweb.Formore  
Maps: Depending on your location, you can view basic,  
custom, and satellite maps and local business  
information, including locations, contact information, and  
driving directions. You can also post public messages  
about a location and track your friends. For more  
GoogleSearch:TheGoogleSearchBarprovides youanon-  
screen Internet search engine powered by Google™. For  
more information, refer to “Google Search Bar” on  
page 28.  
Market: Android Market provides access to downloadable  
applications and games to install on your phone. For more  
Kies air: Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC  
wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on the  
same Wi-Fi network. You can view call logs, videos,  
photos, bookmarks, IMs, and even send SMS messages  
Media Hub: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the  
hottest movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase  
your favorite content and watch from the convenience of  
25  
     
Messages: AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and  
voicemail messages together into a single conversation  
thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more  
My Files: My Files allows you to manage your sounds,  
images, videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other  
memory card data in one convenient location. For more  
Messaging: You can send and receive different types of  
myAT&T: MyAT&T allows you to manage your own AT&T  
account. You can review and pay your bill, check minutes  
and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change your  
MiniDiary:TheMiniDiaryallowsyoutokeepadiaryofyour  
daily activities and also attach pictures. You can publish  
your diary entries to Facebook and MySpace. For more  
Navigation: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS  
navigation system with voice guidance. You can type or  
Movies: The Movies application allows you to rent movies  
News & Weather: Displays current news and weather for  
Now is the time for all good  
men to come to the aid of their  
country. The quick brown fox  
jumps over the lazy dog.  
Music With the Music application, while online, you can play  
:
music that you have added to your music file as well as any  
music you copied from your PC. While offline, you can listen to  
music you have copied from your PC. For more information,  
Places: Places is an application that uses Google Maps  
andyourlocationtohelpyoufindRestaurants,Cafes,Bars,  
Music Player: The Music Player allows you to play music  
filesthatyouhavestoredonyourphoneandmemorycard.  
Youcanalsocreateplaylists.Formoreinformation,referto  
Understanding Your Phone  
26  
®
Polaris Office: Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a  
Social Hub: With Social Hub, you can now easily and  
intuitivelysatisfyallofyourrelevantcommunicationneeds  
from one integrated user experience. E-mails, instant  
messaging, social network contents, and calendar  
contentsfromallmajorserviceprovidersareavailable.For  
Microsoft Office compatible office suite. This  
application provides a central place for managing your  
documents online or offline. For more information,  
QikLite:Allowsyoutorecordandsharelivevideofromyour  
device with your friends, family and your favorite social  
Talk: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based  
application for instant messaging offered by Google.  
Conversation logsare automaticallysaved to aChatsarea  
inyourGmailaccount. Thisallowsyoutosearchachatlog  
and store them in your Gmail accounts. For more  
LITE  
S Memo: The S Memo application allows you to create  
memos using the keypad, the S Pen tool, or both. You can  
addimages,voicerecordings,andtextallinoneplace.For  
Task Manager: The Task Manager application provides  
informationabouttheprocessesandprogramsrunningon  
your phone, as well as the memory status. It can also be  
used to terminate processes and applications. For more  
Samsung Apps: Samsung Apps allows you to easily  
download an abundance of applications to your phone.  
Includes games, news, reference, social networking,  
navigation, and more applications. For more information,  
Videos: The Video application plays video files stored on  
Settings: This icon navigates to the sound and phone  
settings for your phone. It includes such settings as:  
display, security, memory, and any extra settings  
27  
     
VoiceRecorder:TheVoiceRecorderallowsyoutorecordan  
audiofileuptooneminutelongandthenimmediatelysend  
YPmobile:TheYP(Yellowpages)applicationprovidesquick  
and ready access to businesses, map locations, and  
storage of your favorite searches. This application allows  
you to tap into local businesses, locations, and events,  
connecting you to your search in real-time. For more  
Voice Search:TheVoiceSearchfeatureisavoice-activated  
applicationthatallowsyoutotellthephonewhattosearch  
forandthenthephoneactivatesaGooglesearchbasedon  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-used  
applications to the Home screen or to the folders you created. For  
Voicetalk:Withthe Voicetalkapplicationyoucanuseyour  
voice to perform operations that you would normally have  
to do by hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a  
message, playing music, etc. For more information, refer  
Google Search Bar  
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet  
search engine powered by Google™.  
1. From the main home screen, sweep the screen to the left  
YouTube: YouTube is a video sharing website on which  
users can upload and share videos, and view them in  
and tap the Google Search bar  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want to  
search for, then tap Go  
3. Tap to narrow your search results. Tap All  
or Contacts to only search in those areas.  
4. Tap to use Google Voice Search. For more  
.
.
,
Web, Apps  
Understanding Your Phone  
28  
         
Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.  
Tap a menu item to select it.  
Menu Navigation  
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs  
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and features  
can be accessed by scrolling through the available on-screen  
menus. Your phone originally has seven home screens.  
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.  
Touch and Hold  
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For  
example:  
Command Keys  
Menu Key  
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.  
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.  
Press  
Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of options  
Sweep  
for the current screen or feature.  
To sweep, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally across  
the screen. Use sweep when:  
Home Key  
Press  
Home to display the Home screen. Press and hold to  
Unlocking the screen  
display your recently used applications and a shortcut to the Task  
Manager.  
Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu  
Pan  
Back Key  
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device to  
the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must first  
activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:  
Press  
Back to return to the previous screen, option or step.  
Search Key  
Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to another  
page.  
Press  
phone.  
Search to launch Quick Search, to search the web and your  
Terms used in this user manual  
Tap  
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:  
29  
               
Tilt  
Navigating Through the Home Screens  
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the  
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or enlarge the  
screen. Use tilt to:  
Your phone initially has seven home screens. If you like, you can  
place different applications on each of the home screens.  
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with your  
finger in either direction. The main Home Screen is located  
in the middle with three Home screens on each side.  
Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.  
Locking and Unlocking the Phone  
To lock your phone:  
1. Press the lock button  
located on the upper  
right side of your phone.  
The screen should go blank.  
To unlock your phone:  
1. Press the lock button  
right side of your phone.  
located on the upper  
The last screen that you were on, should be displayed.  
Navigating Through the Application Menus  
Your phone initially has four Application Menus available. Follow  
these steps to navigate through the Application Menus:  
Home Screen Overview  
The main home screen is the starting point for many applications  
and functions, and it allows you to add items like application  
icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets to give you instant  
access to information and applications. This is the default page  
1. At the Home screen, tap  
. The first Application Menu  
will be displayed.  
and accessible from any menu by pressing  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
30  
   
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other three  
1. Press  
.
menus.  
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone screen.  
3. Tap one of the application icons.  
2. Tap an option.  
Sub-Menu items  
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application menus that you  
have available will increase.  
Navigating Using Sub-Menus  
Accessing Recently-Used Applications  
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen or  
have selected a feature or application such as Phone, Contacts,  
Messaging, or Web.  
1. Press and hold  
from any screen to open the  
recently-used applications window.  
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.  
To access a sub-menu:  
31  
5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. This creates an  
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the  
Applications tab. The new shortcut then appears to hover  
over the Home screen.  
Customizing Your Home Screen  
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:  
Creating Shortcuts  
Adding and Removing Widgets on the Home Screen  
Repositioning Widgets  
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the  
current page. Once complete, release the screen to lock  
the new shortcut into its new position on the current  
screen.  
Creating Folders  
Changing the Wallpaper  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
Creating Shortcuts  
Adding a shortcut via the Add to home screen  
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen Widgets  
that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a feature,  
action, or launch an application.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.  
3. From the Add to home window, tap Shortcuts  
.
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must first be deleted  
from its current screen. Navigate to the new screen, then add the  
shortcut.  
4. Tap a shortcut from the available list.  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to add the new shortcut  
Adding a shortcut from the Applications Menu  
to your current Home screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
Deleting a shortcut  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
3. Tap  
to display your current applications.  
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from  
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired application.  
its location on the current screen.  
Understanding Your Phone  
32  
   
3. Drag the icon over the Remove icon  
and release it.  
8. Press  
and tap Save  
.
Both items will turn red.  
9. Press  
to return to the Home screen.  
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home  
screens.  
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes it from the  
current screen.  
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
Note: When a primary shortcut is removed, it will then appear as an option in  
the Application menu.  
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the exception  
of the Applications  
and Home  
to activate the Home screen.  
to display your current applications.  
and tap Edit  
shortcuts.  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
1. Press  
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either your  
Applications tab or on the main or extended Home screens.  
Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen  
application.  
2. Tap  
3. Press  
.
4. If the Reorganize icons screen is displayed, tap Switch  
.
Note: To move a Widget from one screen to another, it must first be deleted  
5. Read the Edit applications information and tap OK (this only  
from its current screen. Activate the new screen, then add the Widget.  
displays the first time you edit the Applications menu).  
Adding a Widget  
6. Scroll through the list and locate your desired application.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
7. Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it over the  
primary shortcut that you want to replace. The new  
primary shortcut then appears at the bottom of the screen.  
The old primary shortcut will return to the application  
menu.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
4. From the Add to home window, tap Widgets  
.
33  
   
5. Scroll through the available Widgets at the bottom of the  
7. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want. To  
move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge of the  
page until the page scrolls to the desired page.  
screen, then tap it to place it on your current screen.  
Removing a Widget  
8. Press  
and tap Save  
.
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around on  
the screen.  
9. Press  
to return to the Home screen.  
2. Drag the Widget over the Remove icon  
and release it.  
Deleting Icons from the Applications Menu  
Both items will turn red.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Tap  
to display your current applications.  
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just removes it from  
the current Home screen.  
3. Press  
and tap Edit.  
4. Tap an application that you would like to delete from the  
Moving Icons in the Applications Menu  
Applications menu. It must have a  
order to delete it.  
symbol next to it in  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Tap  
to display your current applications.  
5. Tap the icon.  
6. At the Delete prompt, tap Yes  
The application is deleted.  
3. Press  
and tap Edit.  
.
4. If the Reorganize icons screen is displayed, tap Switch. The  
view type must be set to customizable grid  
.
5. Read the Edit applications information and tap OK (this only  
Note: If you would like to get an application that you have previously deleted,  
displays the first time you edit the Applications menu).  
6. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to  
move.  
Understanding Your Phone  
34  
Creating and Managing Folders  
3. From the Add to home window, tap Wallpapers.  
Folders are located on any of the seven available Home screens  
and can contain both files (such as data and images) and Contact  
information or entries.  
4. Tap one of the following options:  
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken with  
your camera.  
To create a folder on-screen follow these steps:  
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
• Wallpaper gallery: select from many still-life wallpapers.  
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Save or the Set wallpaper icon.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
Moving Home Screens  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
Your phone comes with seven Home screens. You can arrange  
the screens in any order that you want.  
4. From the Add to home window, tap Folders  
.
5. Tap an available folder type to place it on your current  
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:  
screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit  
Choices include New folder, All contacts, Contacts with phone  
numbers, Received list from Bluetooth, Recent documents, and  
Starred contacts.  
2. Press  
.
Note: Starred contacts are those Contact entries tagged as very important.  
Changing the Wallpaper  
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home  
screens by following these steps:  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
35  
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.  
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.  
5. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
In the following example, the Featured Apps Home screen  
is moved to the last position.  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
You can delete Home screens and then add Home screens later if  
you want.  
When you move a Home screen, the other Home screens  
will be re-ordered automatically.  
To delete a Home screen, follow these steps:  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit  
2. Press  
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.  
Understanding Your Phone  
36  
4. Drag the screen over the Remove icon  
and release it.  
To add a Home screen, follow these steps:  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit  
2. Press  
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen that contains  
and  
drag it to the new location.  
5. If there are items on the Home screen that you want to  
delete, the Home screen has items. Delete? prompt is  
displayed.  
6. Tap Yes to remove the page, otherwise, tap No  
.
7. Press to return to the main Home screen.  
Note: The  
icon will only be displayed if a Home screen has previously  
been deleted.  
37  
4. Press  
You can now add items to your new Home screen.  
Notification Bar  
The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show information  
about processes that are running, recent notifications, and alerts.  
To display the Status indicator:  
to return to the main Home screen.  
Clearing Notifications  
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:  
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification Bar  
until the pull-down displays, then drag down vertically.  
On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification Bar  
until the pull-down displays, then drag down vertically.  
Clear Button  
2. Tap the Clear button.  
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.  
Understanding Your Phone  
38  
   
Memory Card  
Important!: If access to the external SD card is not available, download and  
install the USB drivers.  
Your device lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHCcard  
to expand available memory space. This secure digital card  
enables you to exchange images, music, and data between  
SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the features and  
options of your device’s SD functionality. The device has a USB  
SD card mode.  
Mounting the SD Card  
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must  
mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card  
establishes a USB connection with your computer.  
Using the SD Card  
Important!: You must disable USB storage to mount the SD card.  
There are several methods for using the SD card:  
1. Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music, videos,  
or other types of files and media).  
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For more  
2. To activate the camera, video, music player, and other  
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available information  
dependant media or applications.  
on it.  
Important!: The Camera, Audio Postcard, Music Player, and Video  
functionality is all dependant on a mounted SD card. Your device  
can support SDHC cards up to 32GB capacity.  
Unmounting the SD card  
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the  
SD card while removing it from the slot.  
SD Card Overview  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Unmount SD card  
3. Tap OK  
Settings  
Storage.  
After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your  
computer to access and manage the SD card.  
.
.
39  
           
SD card Available Memory Status  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Storage.  
2. The available memory displays under the Total space and  
Available space headings.  
Erasing Files from the SD card  
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.  
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Unmount SD card  
3. Tap Format SD card  
4. At the Format SD Card confirmation prompt, tap Format SD  
Card  
Settings  
Storage.  
.
.
.
Warning!: Performing the next step erases all data stored on the SD card.  
5. Tap Erase everything to format or press  
to cancel.  
Understanding Your Phone  
40  
Section 3: Call Functions  
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also  
includes the features and functionality associated with making or  
answering a call.  
Making an International Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
. The + character appears.  
, then touch and hold  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
code, and phone number.  
Tap  
Settings  
About phone  
Status. Your phone  
If you make a mistake, tap  
been deleted.  
until the desired numbers have  
number is displayed in the My phone number field.  
Making a Call  
3. Tap  
to make the call.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
Manual Pause Dialing  
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.  
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in your  
Contacts list:  
2. Tap  
to make the call.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call menu, the  
phone will automatically redial up to 10 times when the person does  
not answer the call or is already on the phone. For more information,  
keypad to enter the phone number.  
2. Press  
to display the dialer sub-menu.  
3. Tap Add 3 sec pause to add a three-second pause, and use  
the keypad to enter the additional numbers.  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple  
3 sec pauses.  
41  
               
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the calling  
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then tap  
sequence until you enter a number or press a key.  
to make a call.  
5. Tap  
to make the call.  
Making a Call Using Speed Dial  
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your  
Contacts List for speed dialing.  
1. Tap  
to display your Contacts List.  
Correcting an Entered Number  
2. Press  
to display the Contacts List sub-menu.  
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when  
dialing.  
3. Tap Speed dial setting  
.
After entering a number using the keypad:  
4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the  
numbers 2 through 9. The number 1 is reserved for  
Voicemail.  
If you make a mistake, tap  
to erase a single character.  
Press and hold to erase the entire string of numbers.  
Ending a Call  
5. Tap an unused number and the Contacts screen displays.  
Tap the  
key.  
6. Select a contact to assign to the number. The selected  
Dialing a Recent Number  
contact number will display in the speed dial number box.  
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the Call  
log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address Book, the  
associated name also displayed.  
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order, press  
to display the Speed Dial sub-menu.  
8. Tap Change order or Remove  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Logs  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
.
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap  
Keypad and  
.
s
from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial number.  
Call Functions  
42  
         
Making a Call from the Address Book  
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the SIM  
card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are collectively  
called the Address Book.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Finding  
Answering a Call  
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the caller’s  
phone number, or name if stored in the Address Book.  
1. At the incoming call screen:  
Touch and drag  
Touch and drag  
send it to your voicemail.  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to reject the call and  
Touch and slide the Reject call with message tab upward and tap  
a predefined text message to send to the caller.  
2. Tap  
to end the call.  
I am driving  
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or other menu  
feature. After ending the call, the phone returns to the previously active  
function screen.  
I am at the cinema  
I am in class  
I am in a meeting  
Sorry, I am busy. Call back later.  
– or –  
Tap Create new message to compose a new message.  
43  
       
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller is  
listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
Dialing Options  
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the  
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping  
Keypad. From the main Contacts page or from the Dialer,  
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls are  
identified by the following icons:  
the following tabs are located at the top of your screen:  
Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen  
keypad.  
Incoming Calls  
Outgoing Calls  
Missed Calls  
Rejected Calls  
:
Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.  
Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a  
contact to call.  
:
:
Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as Favorites.  
Also displays frequently called numbers.  
:
A
Groups: displays the different groups that are set up on your phone.  
From this tab you can assign your contacts to default groups or create  
your own groups.  
Viewing Missed Calls from the Home Screen  
The number of calls you have missed is displayed on the Home  
screen.  
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to Contacts option  
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.  
1. Tap the missed call icon with the number of missed calls  
Call Log  
on it and move it in any direction.  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the  
details of the call.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Logs  
.
.
s
Call Functions  
44  
         
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller is  
listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
2. Tap the desired missed call. The call detail page is  
displayed.  
3. Tap  
.
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
s
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.  
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create contact to add  
the call to your Address Book.  
Note: If there is a voicemail or message sent by the same number,  
associated icons are displayed and can then be selected.  
The Create contact screen is displayed.  
2. The Call log is displayed. Missed calls are identified by the  
– or –  
icon next to the number  
.
If you want to replace the number for an existing contact,  
Calling Back a Missed Call  
tap Update existing  
.
To call back a missed call number:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
s
45  
   
Sending a Message to a Recent Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
s
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
Call the number  
Send a message  
2. Tap the call you want to send a message to.  
The call detail page is displayed.  
3. Tap  
.
4. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and use  
the on-screen keypad to type in a message.  
Update an existing  
contact  
Add as new  
contact  
5. When you are done with your message, tap Send.  
4. Enter information into the various fields using the keypad.  
5. Tap Save when you are finished.  
Deleting a Call from the Call Log  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
s
Note: By default, your contacts are automatically saved to your phone. To  
change where your contacts are saved to, from the main Contacts  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
screen, press  
More Settings Save new contacts to.  
,
Select Always ask Phone, SIM, or Account.  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Adding  
log.  
3. Tap Delete.  
The call is deleted from the Call log.  
Call Functions  
46  
Adding a Call to the Reject List  
6. You may reset these times to zero by pressing  
then tapping Reset  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs  
.
s
Options During a Call  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can  
use during a call.  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject List.  
3. Tap Add to reject list.  
Adjusting the Call Volume  
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent to  
your voicemail.  
During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the Volume keys  
on the left side of the phone.  
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and  
Call Duration  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
press the Down volume key to decrease the volume level.  
.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume  
using these same keys.  
2. Tap Logs  
.
s
3. Press  
to display the Call log sub-menu.  
In-Call Options  
4. Tap Call duration  
.
During an active call there are several functions available by  
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.  
5. The following times are displayed for Voice:  
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.  
Hold: place the current active call on hold.  
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.  
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls received.  
Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.  
Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can enter  
number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).  
End call: terminates the call.  
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and  
received.  
47  
               
Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or  
through the earpiece.  
Placing a Call on Hold  
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a  
conversation. You can also make another call while you have a  
call in progress if your network supports this service.  
Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can adjust  
the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line will appear  
under the Speaker button.  
1. While on a call, tap Hold  
. This action places the  
Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using the  
will turn grey when Speaker is not activated.  
current caller on hold (which is displayed on-screen as a  
greyed-out box).  
Mute: turn the onboard microphone either on or off.  
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold.  
Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line will  
To make a new call while you have a call in progress  
appear under the Mute button.  
Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will turn  
grey when Mute is not activated.  
1. Tap Hold  
.
2. Tap Add call  
to display the dialer.  
Headset: connects to a Bluetooth headset.  
3. Enter the new number and tap  
.
Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A green line  
will appear under the Headset button.  
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large box  
in the middle of your screen and the call on hold will  
appear in a small box in the upper right corner of your  
screen.  
Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The green line  
will turn grey when the Headset is not activated.  
Press  
for more options:  
Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list.  
Memo: allows you to jot down a memo during a call.  
Noise suppression on/off: allows you to turn on the Noise  
Suppression feature when you are in a noisy area. Turn it Off when not  
needed to conserve battery power.  
Switching Between Calls  
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may switch  
between the two calls, changing the one on hold to active and  
placing the other on hold.  
Call Functions  
48  
     
To end a call on hold  
1. Tap Swap.  
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the  
1. Tap  
to disconnect the active call.  
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so that  
you can continue conversing with that person. The active  
call will appear in a green box.  
2. The call on hold, will now become the active call. Tap  
to end the call.  
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)  
2. Tap  
to end the currently active call.  
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a series of  
incoming calls and place them on hold. If this service is  
supported by the network, all calls can be joined together. You  
are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone.  
To end a specific call  
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a green  
box.  
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have established with  
your phone (both active and on hold).  
2. Tap  
to end the specific call.  
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates the previous  
call.  
3. Tap  
to end the remaining call.  
To answer a call while you have a call in progress  
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with your  
phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.  
1. Touch and drag  
in any direction to answer another  
call.  
1. Touch and drag  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to answer the next  
The first call is automatically put on hold.  
2. Touch and drag  
2. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.  
call.  
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the  
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap Swap  
again to switch back.  
The first call is automatically put on hold.  
3. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by  
tapping Merge.  
49  
   
4. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold  
To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold  
5. Tap to end the call.  
.
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your  
phone) to adjust the volume.  
.
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker  
.
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call  
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the speakerphone  
feature.  
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)  
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so that  
the other person cannot hear you.  
1. Tap Speaker  
.
The Speaker button now appears as  
and the  
speakerphone is activated.  
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room, but do not want  
the person on the phone to hear you.  
To mute your phone during a call  
Mute  
1. Tap Mute  
.
Mute  
The Mute button now appears as  
and Mute is  
activated.  
Mute  
2. Tap Mute  
to deactivate the Mute function and  
reactivate the microphone.  
Call Functions  
50  
       
Bluetooth headset  
Call Waiting  
Headset  
1. Tap Headset  
.
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming call  
while you have a call in progress, if this service is supported by  
the network, and you must first activate the Call Waiting feature:  
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When  
found, connect to the headset.  
Tap  
Settings  
Call  
Additional settings  
Headset  
The Headset button now appears as  
and the  
Call waiting  
.
Bluetooth headset is activated.  
A checkmark will appear in the box when activated. You  
are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone.  
Headset  
3. Tap Headset  
to deactivate the Bluetooth headset  
and reactivate the phone speaker.  
Searching for a Number in Address Book  
1. During the active call, press  
then tap Contacts  
2. Tap the Address Book entry.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see “Finding  
51  
   
Section 4: Entering Text  
This section describes how to select the desired text input  
method when entering characters into your phone. This section  
also describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the  
amount of key strokes associated with entering text.  
Entering Text Using the Android Keyboard  
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone  
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen  
QWERTY keypad will display.  
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that can  
tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways  
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.  
Text Input Methods  
There are three text input methods available:  
Android keyboard: an on-screen QWERTY keypad that can be  
used in both portrait and landscape orientation.  
Samsung Keypad (default): Samsung’s on-screen QWERTY  
keypad that can be used in both portrait and landscape  
orientation.  
Shift  
Key  
Delete  
Key  
New  
Voice to Text  
Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead of  
tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each letter of a  
word.  
Space Bar  
Paragraph  
Keypad Settings  
Text Input Mode  
Entering Text  
52  
             
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad  
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the on-  
screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.  
The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc  
.
Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number,  
symbol, and emoticon keys.  
?123  
ABC  
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys. Can  
also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift (  
) key.  
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.  
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the  
first letter, the shift key (  
following letters will be lowercase.  
5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap  
) will change to  
and  
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in Sym mode, the  
Abc ABC abc button will appear.  
/
/
Using Abc Mode  
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a  
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will change to  
in ABC mode. All following letters will be uppercase  
until you tap the shift key again.  
Landscape orientation.  
2. When you tap the Tap to enter message field, the following  
screen displays:  
53  
         
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode  
Show Suggestions  
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or  
emoticons.  
By using the Show Suggestions option (on by default), you can  
have next-letter prediction and regional error correction, which  
compensates for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY  
keyboard.  
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape  
orientation.  
1. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing a  
word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of the  
words to replace the word that has already been typed or  
scroll the line of words to the left for more word choices.  
?123  
2. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen. The following screen  
displays:  
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon characters.  
ALT  
4. Tap the  
button to access additional symbols.  
2. Continue typing your message. Tap Send to send the  
ABC  
5. Tap  
to return to Abc mode.  
message or press  
for more options. For more  
Entering Text  
54  
           
Entering Text Using Swype  
Note: You can also use the Show Suggestions option in the portrait  
orientation.  
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a word  
by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting your  
finger between words. Swype uses error correcting algorithms  
and a language model to predict the next word. Swype also  
includes a tapping predictive text system.  
Setting the Show Suggestions Option  
The Show Suggestions option is on by default. To turn if on or off,  
follow these steps:  
1. While composing a message, tap  
2. Tap Android keyboard settings  
.
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”. Put  
your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it to the  
“h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.  
.
3. Tap Show suggestions to create or delete the checkmark.  
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keypad  
The Samsung Keypad is an on-screen QWERTY keypad similar to  
the Android Keyboard with several minor differences.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Language  
and keyboard Select Input Method  
.
2. Tap the Samsung keypad option. A green circle will appear.  
For information on changing Samsung Keypad settings, see  
Enabling and Configuring Swype  
The Android Keyboard is the default text input method, so to use  
Swype, you must first change the default keyboard setting.  
55  
       
To enable Swype:  
Using the Voice to Text Feature  
1. While composing a message, touch and hold anywhere on  
the message screen.  
You can use your voice to enter text using the Voice to Text  
feature.  
1. From any messaging screen, tap  
.
2. Tap Input method  
3. Tap the Swype option. A green circle should appear next to  
Swype  
.
2. At the Speak now prompt, speak clearly and distinctly into  
the microphone.  
.
3. Working... is displayed while the software is converting  
Swype Settings  
your voice to text.  
For information on how you can configure your Swype settings,  
4. The text is displayed in the message.  
Swype Text Entry Tips  
Note: The feature works best when you break your message down into  
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video or  
tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following Swype  
text entry tips.  
smaller segments.  
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such as pp  
in apple).  
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a  
selection.  
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter contractions.  
Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a misspelled  
word, then tap the delete key to erase one character. Touch and hold  
the delete key to erase an entire word.  
Entering Text  
56  
   
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book  
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by storing  
their name and number in your Address Book. Address Book  
entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group. Y  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Contacts  
delete it, or if you want to access Contacts from another Home screen,  
you must tap Applications Contacts . You can tap  
Contacts to access Contacts from the Dialer.  
icon. If you  
Contacts  
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into your SIM card, note that only  
the name, phone number, group, and slot location are initially offered  
as fields (some SIM cards may allow an address as well). Although you  
may add additional fields to a SIM entry; if you move that same SIM  
card to another model phone, it is possible that only the basic  
information will be transferred.  
Adding a New Contact  
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your  
Address Book.  
Saving a Number from the Home screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
AT&T Address Book Activation  
.
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network backup  
service, contacts are automatically synchronized between your  
phone and online address book. The changes you make are  
automatically saved and if you ever upgrade, damage, or lose  
your phone, you can easily restore your contacts onto your new  
phone.  
2. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new entry  
by choosing one of three options:  
• Album to retrieve a previously stored image from your Pictures  
folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an image to assign the image  
to the contact, then tap Save  
.
Take photo to use the camera to take a new picture and assign it to  
this entry.  
To activate the AT&T Address Book:  
From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
• S Memo to use an image from S Memo.  
Your Address Book is displayed.  
• Remove icon although not an option with a new entry, deletes any  
previously assigned image on an existing contact.  
57  
             
Work  
3. Tap the Given name and Family name fields and use the on-  
screen keypad to enter names for each entry. For more  
The Work button  
initially displays next to the Email  
address field. If you want to add an Email address that is  
not a Home email address, tap the Work button and select  
from Work, Home, Mobile, Other, or Custom (add your own  
label).  
4. Tap  
next to the Family name field to display additional  
name fields.  
5. Tap the Phone number field.  
The numerical keypad is displayed.  
Mobile  
9. Enter the Email address.  
Tap  
to add another Email address field or tap  
to  
delete a field.  
The Mobile button  
initially displays next to the  
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number  
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and  
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,  
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.  
10. Tap the IM field.  
The QWERTY keypad is displayed.  
Google Talk  
The Google Talk button  
initially displays next to the  
Instant msg field. If you want to add an instant message  
address that is not Google Talk, tap the Google Talk button  
and select from Google Talk, AIM, Windows Live, Yahoo!,  
Skype, QQ, ICQ, Jabber, or Custom (add your own label).  
6. Enter the phone number.  
Tap  
to add another Phone number field or tap  
to  
delete a field.  
7. Tap the Internet call field and use the keypad to enter an  
11. Enter the IM address.  
internet address.  
Tap  
to add another Instant msg address field or tap  
to delete a field.  
8. Tap the Email address field.  
The keypad is displayed.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
58  
12. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to your  
new contact:  
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers  
When you call automated systems, you are often required to  
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually  
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers in  
your Contacts along with special characters called pauses and  
waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two seconds  
and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you enter a  
number or press a key.  
• Groups: assign the contact to Family, Friends, or Work group.  
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will  
sound when messages are received from this contact. Choose  
between Default ringtone, Select sound from My Files, or Phone  
ringtone.  
• Postal Address: adds a field used to assign a physical  
postal address for this entry.  
To add a pause or a wait to a Contact:  
• Organization: adds an organization field for this entry.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
, and then tap the  
• More: Tap  
to add the following fields:  
name or number to open the Contact.  
Notes: adds a field that allows you to jot down notes.  
2. Tap Edit  
.
Nickname: adds a field that can be used to enter a nickname for the  
entry. The Nickname is not displayed when calls are made to or received  
from the contact.  
3. Tap the phone number field.  
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait  
Website: adds a field for the contact’s Web site URL.  
Birthday: adds a field for the contact’s birthday.  
needs to be added.  
+
#
?
Anniversary: adds a field for the contact’s anniversary.  
5. Tap  
.
13. Tap Save to save the new contact.  
6. Tap Pause to add a two-second pause or tap Wait to add a  
wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.  
A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and a wait will be  
displayed as a semi-colon (;).  
Note: By default, your contacts are automatically saved to your phone. To  
change where your contacts are saved to, from the main Contacts  
screen, press  
More Settings Save new contacts to.  
Select Always ask Phone, SIM, or Account.  
,
7. Tap Save to store your changes.  
59  
 
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum number of  
phone numbers the SIM card can store and how they are stored  
may differ.  
Editing an Existing Contact  
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and change  
or delete the information, or you can add additional fields to the  
contact’s list of information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
. Tap the Contact  
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a letter  
on the right side of the display to quickly jump to the  
contacts beginning with that letter.  
that you want to edit.  
2. Tap Edit  
.
3. Tap  
to add a new field and tap  
to delete a field.  
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete information.  
5. Tap Save to save the edited information.  
Using Contacts  
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book, you  
can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM card  
location number or by using the Search field to locate the entry.  
From the Address book, you can also send messages.  
Finding an Address Book Entry  
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.  
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names  
onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory. The two  
locations are physically separate but are used as a single entity,  
called the Address Book.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
60  
         
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the  
corporate email account login because they are maintained  
separately and for different groups of people.  
message icon to send a message.  
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as  
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google. When  
you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each account  
creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.  
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a regular  
email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a  
Facebook account under her maiden and married name, as well  
as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge these accounts into  
your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the  
information in one record.  
The next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts,  
any updates that contacts make to email account names, email  
addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list.  
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see  
Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a call. Sweep  
left over a listing to send a message.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
Joining Contacts  
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to another  
entry). Note: typically this is the same contact with a  
different name or account information.  
Joining Contact Information  
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social  
networking logins, and other similar account information. For  
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a  
3. Press  
Join contact.  
61  
   
The contact list is displayed.  
Marking a Contact as Default  
When you use messaging type applications, the application  
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a contact  
entry list. For example, you may have three different contact  
records for John Smith, so the application will be looking for the  
“default” number or entry.  
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to join).  
The second contact is now joined with the first and the  
account information is merged into one screen.  
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
record for easier viewing when you join the contacts.  
2. Tap a Contact name.  
5. Tap the joined contacts bar to view the contact information  
you joined. The contacts and information displays with an  
icon next to the contact name to indicate what type of  
account information is contained in the entry.  
3. Press  
Mark as default. The Mark as default screen  
displays radio buttons next to the contact names or phone  
numbers of all the linked contacts. The radio button next to  
the default contact will be green.  
Unjoining a Contact  
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next to  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
another entry that you want to be the default. The radio  
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you  
want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same  
contact with a different name or account information.  
button will turn green, then tap Save  
.
Synchronizing Accounts  
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to  
synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you  
want the applications to synchronize automatically. After  
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate  
which account to synchronize with your Contacts list.  
3. Tap the joined contacts bar.  
4. Tap the minus sign  
next to entry in which you want to  
unjoin. The contact is now separated and no longer  
displays in the merged record screen.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
62  
 
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
2. Press then tap More Accounts  
.
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.  
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For more  
.
3. Determine which type of account information you want to  
synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:  
• My profile: allows you to set up a profile for yourself. The  
information will be the same that you can add for a new contact.  
• Background data: (applications that sync, send, and receive data  
any time).  
• Auto-sync: allows applications to automatically synchronize.  
• Merge with Google: allows you to merge your contacts together  
with your Google account contacts.  
4. Tap Add account  
.
• Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your  
memory card. You can also send a namecard via Bluetooth, Email,  
Gmail, or Messaging.  
5. Tap an account type to add.  
6. Follow the on-screen instructions. The selected account  
type synchronizes with your Contacts list. For more  
• More: the following additional options are displayed:  
View Friends: allows you to get contacts from your friends on  
Facebook, LinkedIn, Corporate or Google accounts. Tap Add account  
and then follow the on-screen instructions.  
Address Book Options  
You can access Address Book options while at the main Address  
Book page or while in the details page for a specific entry.  
Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on  
Facebook, LinkedIn, Corporate or Google accounts. Tap Add account  
and then follow the on-screen instructions.  
Send email: allows you to send an email using Email, Gmail, or  
Options in Address Book  
Messaging.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
then press  
.
Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.  
SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your phone to  
your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.  
2. The following options display:  
63  
   
Display options: You can choose to only display contacts that have  
phone numbers, sort by given name or family name, display contacts by  
Given name first or Family name first, display contacts stored on your  
phone, SIM, and/or display contacts stored to other accounts. Tap a  
selection and tap Done.  
• Add to reject list: allows you to add this contact to your reject list. If  
they call, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.  
• Send namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s information  
via Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or Messaging.  
• Print namecard: allows you to print the contact’s namecard to a  
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.  
Settings: allows you to choose where to save your new contacts,  
display or edit your service numbers, send contact information by  
Bluetooth, or sync your phone with the contacts in your online AT&T  
Address Book.  
Groups  
Adding an Entry to a Group  
Options at Selected Contact Screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
.
2. Press and hold the contact name that you want to add to a  
2. Touch and hold a contact.  
group.  
3. The following options display depending on whether your  
3. Tap Add to group  
.
contact is saved to your phone or your SIM card:  
4. Tap a group entry.  
• Edit: allows you to edit the selected contact’s information.  
The contact is added to the group.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address Book.  
• Join contact: allows you to join contacts with other contacts (only  
Removing an Entry From a Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
displays when contact is saved to SIM).  
Groups  
.
Groups  
• Send contact information: allows you to send a contacts  
information in a message.  
2. Tap a group entry.  
• Add to favorites: allows you to add the contact to your favorites list.  
3. Press  
Remove member.  
• Add to group: allows you to add the contact to a pre-defined group  
such as Family, Friends, or Work. see “Adding an Entry to a  
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group.  
A green checkmark will appear next to their name.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
64  
         
5. Tap Remove  
.
3. Press  
Edit group.  
The contacts are now removed from the group.  
4. Make modifications to the Group Name or Ringtone fields.  
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.  
6. Tap Save to save your changes.  
Creating a New Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Create  
Groups  
Groups  
.
Address Book Favorites  
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book, you  
can add them to your Favorites list.  
To view your Favorites list:  
From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Favorites  
3. Tap Ringtone to choose an audio file for assignment to this  
.
Favorites  
new group. Choose from Default ringtone  
,
Select sound  
from My Files, or Phone ringtone  
.
Adding Favorites to your Address Book  
Tap a music file to play a short sample and then tap OK to complete  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
the assignment.  
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that you  
4. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.  
5. Tap Save to store the new Group category.  
Editing a Caller Group  
want to add to your favorites list.  
3. Tap Add to favorites on the displayed list.  
4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the Address  
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part  
of the selected group.  
Book.  
Removing Favorites from your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Groups  
.
Groups  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Tap a group entry.  
65  
       
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that you  
want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in your  
Favorites list will have a gold star.  
The phone then displays a list of your current phone  
contacts.  
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to those  
3. Tap Remove from favorites on the displayed list.  
entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.  
4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact in  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the SIM  
or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all entries.  
the Address Book.  
4. Tap Copy  
.
Managing Address Book Entries  
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the Phone  
and SIM entries on your phone.  
5. At the Copy Successful display, tap OK  
.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.  
Copying an Entry to the SIM Card  
Copying an Entry to the Phone  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
SIM Management  
2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM  
More  
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card, note that only  
the name, phone number, group, and slot location are initially offered  
as fields (some SIM cards may allow an address as well). To save  
additional information for a particular contact, such as other phone  
numbers, or e-mail, it is important to add new fields to that Contact  
information. It is also important to note that if you move the SIM card to  
another phone that does not support additional fields on the SIM card,  
this additional information may not be available.  
.
.
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts  
stored on your SIM card.  
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to those  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
SIM Management  
2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM  
More  
entries you wish to have copied to your phone.  
.
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to your  
phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all entries.  
.
4. Tap Copy  
.
Contacts and Your Address Book  
66  
         
5. At the Copy Successful display, tap OK  
.
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card supports Service  
Dialing Numbers.  
The selected numbers are copied to your phone.  
Deleting Address Book Entries  
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s memory.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that you  
want to delete.  
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.  
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete the contact or Cancel  
to exit.  
Using the Service Dialing Numbers  
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN) assigned  
by your service provider. These numbers may include emergency  
numbers, customer service numbers, and directory inquiries.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
Settings  
2. Tap Service numbers  
More  
.
.
3. Scroll through the available numbers and tap a number to  
make a call.  
67  
   
Section 6: Multimedia  
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your  
phone, including Media Hub, Music Player, Music, Movies, Live  
TV, Qik Lite, Videos, Gallery, Camera, and Camcorder.  
The Media Hub screen displays.  
4. At the Media Hub screen, the following options appear:  
• What’s new: shows recently added media that you can rent or  
purchase.  
Media Hub  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and  
TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your fingertips,  
entertaining yourself or your kids on the go has never been  
easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch  
from the convenience of anywhere. Featuring the stunning  
viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media Hub is  
your gateway to mobile video like you've never experienced it  
before.  
• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have  
purchased or rented. Tap a media entry to view it.  
• Movie Store: displays movies that are available for rent or  
purchase. Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a movie  
category. The movies of that type will be displayed below.  
• TV Store: displays TV shows that are available for purchase. Scroll  
through the top navigation bar and select a TV category. The TV  
shows of that type will be displayed below.  
5. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you  
Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.  
would like to purchase or rent.  
Using Media Hub  
6. Information concerning the media displays. Tap WATCH  
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
PREVIEW to watch a short preview or tap Rent or Own  
.
7. In order to rent or buy media, you must first create an  
2. Tap  
Media Hub  
.
account. Use the keypad to enter the required information,  
then tap Create Account  
.
3. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap  
Accept to continue or Decline to exit.  
Multimedia  
68  
         
8. Choose a payment method and then follow the on-screen  
5. The following Music Player controls are available:  
Pause the song.  
instructions.  
9. The media will now be stored in the My Media folder.  
Start the song after being paused.  
Music Player  
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to  
previous song.  
The Music Player is an application that can play music files. The  
music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+,  
MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the Music Player  
allows you to navigate through your music library, play songs,  
and create playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are  
displayed).  
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go  
to next song.  
Volume control.  
Repeat one: repeats the currently playing song.  
Repeatall: replays the current list when the list ends.  
Play All: plays the current song list once.  
Playing Music  
1. Tap  
Music Player  
.
2. Read the Music Player tips and tap Done when you are  
finished. Tap the Do not show again field if you don’t want  
to see the tips again.  
Shuffle On: the current list of songs are randomly  
shuffled for playback.  
Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not shuffled.  
3. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (All,  
Playlists, Albums, Artists, or Folders) to view the available  
music files.  
5.1Ch  
Allows you to listen to music using 5.1 Virtual  
Surround Sound.  
(
(
)
)
Displays your list of songs.  
List  
4. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to begin  
playback.  
69  
                   
• Settings: allows you to change your music player settings. For  
Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works in earphone mode only.  
Music Player Options  
Music Player Settings  
To access additional options, follow these steps:  
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for  
the music player such as whether you want the music to play in  
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu  
displays.  
1. While in the Music Player, press  
.
2. While playing a song, the follow options are available:  
• Add to quick list: adds the current music file to the Quick list.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Settings  
3. Select one of the following settings:  
Music Player  
.
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth  
headset.  
.
• Share music via: allows you to share your music by using AllShare,  
Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi.  
• Equalizer: set a type of equalization. Selections are: Auto, Normal,  
Pop, rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, Live, or Custom.  
• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a  
selected playlist.  
• Sound effects: configure the music effects. Selections are: Normal,  
Wide, Concert Hall, Music clarity, Bass enhancement, or  
Externalization.  
• Settings: allows you to change your music player settings. For  
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories you  
want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres, Folders,  
Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently  
added. Tap each item that you want to display in the Music menu.  
• Details: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title, Album,  
Track Length, Genre, Recording date, etc.  
3. Before playing a song, the follow options are available:  
• Add to playlist: allows you to add music files to a selected playlist.  
• Search: allows you to search your music files using keywords.  
• Delete: allows you to delete music files from your phone.  
• Lyrics: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if  
available.  
• Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn off  
after a set interval.  
Multimedia  
70  
 
Removing Music from a Playlist  
Using Playlists  
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media  
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback. These  
Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music Player  
options menu or from within a 3rd party music application (such  
as Windows Media Player) and then downloaded to the handset.  
To remove music files from a playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Player  
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.  
4. Press Remove  
Creating a Playlist  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Player  
.
5. Tap the checkbox to the right of each track you want to  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all the  
music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove  
.
3. Press  
Create.  
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap Save  
.
Editing a Playlist  
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can  
also rename the playlist.  
Adding Music to a Playlist  
To add files to the playlist:  
To edit a playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music Player  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Playlists  
3. Press  
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.  
5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap Save  
Music Player  
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.  
4. Tap Add music  
Edit title.  
.
5. Tap the music tracks that you would like to add to the  
.
playlist, or tap Select all to add all the music tracks to this  
playlist then tap Add  
.
71  
           
For information on downloading music for your phone, see  
3. Read the Terms of Service, enter any required information,  
and tap OK  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to rent movies.  
Live TV  
.
Music  
With the Music application, while online, you can play music that  
you have added to your music file as well as any music you  
copied from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you  
have copied from your PC.  
Live TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch your  
favorite TV shows using your handset.  
1. Tap  
Live TV  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music  
.
Your music is displayed as icons on the screen.  
Note: The first time you use Live TV, you will need to download the updated  
application from the Market. When the Market page displays, tap  
Update or Install then follow the on-screen instructions. For more  
2. Sweep your screen to the left to see all of your music.  
3. Touch an icon to play the song.  
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to continue  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
or Exit to exit.  
Movies  
3. If you have Wi-Fi activated, tap Disable Wi-Fi  
.
The Movies application allows you to rent movies to watch on  
your phone.  
4. The Live TV main page displays. Follow the on-screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Applications Unknown sources  
Settings  
instructions to watch TV.  
.
Note: Live TV will use a large amount of data and you are responsible for all  
data charges. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade to an  
unlimited data plan in addition to this purchase.  
You are now allowed to download non-Market  
applications.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Movies  
.
Multimedia  
72  
           
Qik Lite  
Qik Lite is a mobile video sharing service that lets you record and  
share experiences with your friends, family, and your favorite  
social networks. Your video is automatically saved as you record.  
You can also use Qik Lite to Video Chat with your friends.  
qik.com/  
.
• Video Chat: allows you to participate in two-way video chats.  
• Video Mail: allows you to send videos by email.  
• Record & Share: allows you to record videos and have them  
Note: The first time you use Qik Lite, you will need to download the updated  
application from the Market. When the Market page displays, tap  
Update or Install then follow the on-screen instructions. For more  
instantly uploaded to the web for sharing or safe-keeping.  
• Video Gallery: allows you to store your Qik videos in a gallery for  
easy viewing.  
1. You will need to sign onto a Wi-Fi network first in order to  
Using Video Chat  
To use Video Chat, you and the person you want to Video Chat  
with must have a Qik Video account and be signed in.  
1. Tap  
Qik Lite  
.
LITE  
2. Tap  
Qik Lite  
.
LITE  
2. Sign on to your Qik Video account and tap Video Chat  
.
3. The first time you access Qik Lite, tap Sign up to create  
your Qik account and follow the on-screen prompts. The  
instructions will help you download the app from the  
3. At the Video Chat screen, tap Dialpad, then enter the phone  
number or the Qik user name of the person you want to  
Video Chat with.  
Market. Otherwise, tap Log in  
4. Tap the Username and Password fields and enter your  
information, then tap Log in  
.
4. Tap Start Video Chat  
.
.
The phone number you dialed will ring in the usual manner  
and they must answer the call for the video chat to begin.  
73  
     
Original size view. The video will be played in  
its original size.  
Note: If the contact is not a Qik user, you have the option to send them a  
video mail. Tap Yes to continue, then tap Record new or Browse  
Gallery.  
Full-screeninratio view. Thevideoisenlarged  
as much as possible without becoming distorted.  
5. To end the Video Chat, tap End Chat  
.
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,  
which may cause some minor distortion.  
Videos  
The Videos application plays video files stored on your microSD  
card.  
5.1Ch  
Allowsyoutolistentomusicusing5.1Virtual  
Surround Sound.  
(
(
)
)
1. Tap  
Videos  
.
2. All videos that you have on your memory card will be  
displayed. Tap the video that you want to play.  
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon that is  
displayed, is the mode that will appear after the icon is tapped.  
3. The video will begin to play.  
4. The following video controls are available:  
Pause the video.  
Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works in earphone mode only.  
For more information on downloading videos for your phone, see  
Start the video after being paused.  
Gallery  
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to  
go to previous video.  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For  
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and share  
as a picture message.  
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.  
Tap to go to next video.  
Volume control.  
1. Tap  
Gallery  
.
Multimedia  
74  
         
All of the Albums that hold your pictures, videos, and  
screen captures will be displayed with folder name and  
number of files.  
Viewing Videos  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the  
picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them.  
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be  
1. Touch and hold a video to select it. A checkmark will  
displayed.  
appear on the thumbnail.  
2. The following options are available:  
Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you access Gallery,  
delete some of the files by using My Files or other file management  
• Send via: allows you to share the video via Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,  
Messaging, or Wi-Fi  
• Delete: allows you to delete the video. Tap Confirm deletions  
and the video will be deleted.  
Viewing Pictures  
• More: displays the following additional options:  
1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture.  
Share via: allows you to share a video via Facebook or YouTube.  
Play via: allows you to play a video via AllShare.  
Rename: allows you to rename a video.  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in addition to the  
picture, tap anywhere on the screen to display them.  
Details: provides details about the picture such as Title, Type, Date  
taken, name of the Album it is in, Location, Latitude and Longitude (GPS  
coordinates), Size, Resolution, Duration, and File location.  
2. The following options are available:  
• Send via: allows you to send the picture via Bluetooth, Email,  
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi.  
3. Tap a thumbnail to play the video.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the picture. Tap Confirm deletions and  
the picture will be deleted.  
For video player controls, see “Videos” on page 74.  
75  
   
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
Camera  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone. You  
can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in  
camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces photos  
in JPEG format.  
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume  
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up to  
x4 (400 percent).  
Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with  
another person’s privacy.  
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap on-screen  
icons to access various camera options and settings.  
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the area  
Using the Camera  
you touch.  
Taking Photos  
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds. (The  
picture is automatically stored within your designated  
storage location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures are  
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as  
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the  
camera key.  
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows  
may appear on the photo.  
Note: To enable the GPS icon, from the Camera screen tap  
GPS tag On  
Settings  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera  
to activate  
.
the camera mode.  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Camera  
icon. If you  
delete it, or if you want to access the camera from another Home  
screen, you must tap Applications  
Camera  
.
Multimedia  
76  
           
Camera Options  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen.  
Storage  
Battery Charge  
Mode  
Display Image  
Front  
Facing  
Camera  
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Tap the screen to make  
them reappear.  
Flash  
Camera  
Key  
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in  
various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for  
Camcorder.  
Image  
Viewer  
Settings  
7. To view a picture, tap the Image Viewer.  
8. While viewing a picture, double-tap the screen to zoom in  
Self portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you can  
take pictures of yourself or video chat.  
or out.  
– or –  
Flash: allowsyoutoset theflash optionstoOff, On, orAuto  
flash.  
Pinch the screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it outwards  
to zoom in.  
A
9. Press  
to return to the viewfinder.  
Settings:  
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the  
settings that you use the most.  
Self-portrait: allows you tosetthefrontcameraso youcan  
take pictures of yourself or video chat.  
77  
   
Settings (continued):  
Scene mode: allows you to set the Scene to help take the  
best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,  
Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,  
Sunset, Dawn, Fall Color, Firework, Text, Candlelight, and  
Backlight. Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at  
the bottom of the display screen.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash optionsto Off, On, or Auto  
flash.  
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode.  
Options are:  
Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before  
returning to the shooting mode.  
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level  
by moving the slider.  
Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your  
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s smile,  
it takes the picture.  
Focus mode: allows you to set this option to Auto focus,  
Macro, or Face detection. Use Macro mode to take close-  
up pictures. Face detection causes the camera to  
automaticallyrecognizeifthereisafaceintheshot.Itthen  
optimizesthefocusandexposuretheface. UseAutofocus  
for all others.  
Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features.  
Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an  
initial photo and then adding additional images to  
itself. The guide box lets you view the area where the  
second part of the panoramic picture should fall  
within.  
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait  
before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec,  
and 10 sec.  
Share shot: allows you to send a picture via Wi-Fi after  
taking it.  
Effects:allowsyoutochangethecolortoneorapplyspecial  
effects to the photo. Options include: None, Negative,  
Grayscale, and Sepia.  
Action shot: detects action and creates a panorama of  
the moving object.  
Cartoon: gives your photo a cartoon look.  
Multimedia  
78  
Settings (continued):  
Blink detection: detects the blinking of human eyes and  
gives you a warning.  
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either: 8M  
(3264x2448), W6.5M (3264x1968), 3.2M (2048x1536),  
W2.4M (2048x1232), W0.4M (800x480), or 0.3M  
(640x480).  
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.  
White balance: allows you to set this option to one of the  
followingchoices:Auto,Daylight,Cloudy,Incandescent,or  
Fluorescent.  
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known as  
Geotagging). The location of where the picture is taken is  
attached to the picture. (Only available in Camera mode.)  
ISO:ISOdetermineshowsensitivethelightmeterisonyour  
digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800.  
Use a lower ISO number to make your camera less  
sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take photos with  
lesslight,orAutotoletthecameraautomaticallyadjustthe  
ISO for each of your shots  
Shutter sound: allowsyou to set the Shuttersound to On or  
Off.  
Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to  
take and save a mirror-image picture when using the self  
portrait camera.  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory  
card (if inserted).  
Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or  
meters the light source: Centre-weighted, Spot, or Matrix.  
Anti-Shake:reducesimageblurduetothemovementofthe  
subject of the photo or hand movement.  
Reset:allowsyoutoresetallcameraorcamcordersettings  
to the default values.  
Autocontrast:providesaclearimageevenunderbacklight  
circumstances where intensity of illumination can vary  
excessively.  
79  
Available options are:  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and  
the various viewing options for a selected picture. Image  
viewer options are described in the following section. The  
last picture you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail in  
the Image viewer icon.  
Share: offers several ways to share your picture or video. Options are:  
AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Messaging, Photo editor,  
Picasa, S Memo, Social Hub, and Wi-Fi.  
Delete  
Cancel  
More: allows you to do the following:  
:
.
allows you to delete the current picture. Tap OK to delete or  
Picture Image Viewer Options  
Set as: allows you to assign the current image as a Contact icon, your  
Home screen wallpaper, or your Lock screen wallpaper.  
Rename: allows you to rename a picture or video.  
After you take a photo, you can access various options from the  
Image Viewer.  
Image  
Return to previous page  
(
): takes you back to the previously  
active camera page where you can take another photo or shoot a new  
video.  
Accessing Pictures  
When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Camera folder.  
You can view your pictures immediately or view them anytime in  
the Camera folder.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
DCIM Camera  
2. Tap a photo file to open it in the Image viewer.  
My Files  
.
3. Sweep the screen to the left to see the next picture or to  
Return to  
previous page  
More  
Share  
Delete  
the right to see the previous picture.  
Multimedia  
80  
   
Before you select a picture, press  
see the following options:  
in the Camera folder to  
Selecting and Using the Pictures  
From the Image viewer, you have access to both macro functions  
(zoom, crop, and rotate) and menu options. For more information,  
Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Bluetooth,  
Calendar, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Messaging, Photo editor, Picasa,  
S Memo, Social Hub, Wi-Fi, or YouTube.  
Assigning an Image to an Address Book Entry  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Create folder: create a new sub-folder in the current folder. Can be on  
either the Phone or Memory Card.  
My Files  
DCIM  
Camera  
<image>  
.
Delete allows you to delete selected pictures. Tap the checkmark, to turn  
:
it green, next to any file or folder you want to delete, then tap Delete.  
View by: allows you to view the contents of the current folder as a list,  
as a list and details, or as thumbnails.  
2. Press  
Set as  
Contact icon. Tap a contact entry.  
3. Touch and drag the orange crop box anywhere on the  
picture.  
List by: allows you to view the contents of the current folder sorted by  
Time, Type, Name, or Size.  
4. Tap Save  
.
More: provides you with the additional options: Move, Copy, Rename,  
and Settings.  
Move: allows you to move one or more pictures to a different folder.  
Copy: allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different folder.  
Rename: allows you to rename one or more picture files.  
Settings: lets you set several general folder options:  
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My Files  
DCIM  
Camera  
<image>.  
• Show hidden files: causes files and folders that would normally be  
hidden to be displayed.  
2. Press  
– or –  
Set as  
Home screen wallpaper  
.
• Show file extension: causes file extensions to be displayed. For  
example, jpg.  
Press  
Set as  
Lock screen wallpaper  
.
• Set Home directory: allows you to choose and set the Home  
directory.  
81  
3. Touch and drag the orange crop box anywhere on the  
4. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The red  
picture.  
light will blink while recording.  
4. Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image. Tap Cancel to stop  
5. Tap the Video key ( ) again to stop the recording and  
without updating the wallpaper image.  
save the video file to your Camera folder.  
6. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer, then  
Using the Camcorder  
tap  
to play your video for review.  
to return to the viewer.  
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a  
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send videos.  
7. Press  
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to a memory  
Display Image  
Battery Charge  
Mode  
Video time  
Remaining  
Storage  
card with a slow transfer speed.  
Recording  
Shooting Video  
Mode  
Flash  
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is  
recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by  
having the light source behind you.  
Camcorder  
Key  
Settings  
Image  
Viewer  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera  
to activate  
the camera mode.  
Camcorder Options  
2. Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to Camcorder  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen.  
Mode.  
3. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Tap the screen to make  
them reappear.  
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.  
Multimedia  
82  
             
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode to:  
Normal, which is limited only by available space on the  
destination location, Limit for MMS, which is limited by  
MMS size restrictions, and Self recording which activates  
the front-facing camera so you can video yourself.  
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in  
various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for  
Camcorder.  
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level  
by moving the slider  
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode to:  
Normal, which is limited only by available space on the  
destination location, Limit for MMS, which is limited by  
MMS size restrictions, and Self recording which activates  
the front-facing camera so you can video yourself.  
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait  
beforetakingavideo.Optionsinclude:Off,2sec,5sec,and  
10 sec.  
Effects:allowsyoutochangethecolortoneorapplyspecial  
effects to the photo. Options include: None, Negative,  
Grayscale, and Sepia.  
Flash:allowsyoutosettheflashoptionstoOfforOn. When  
yousettheflashtoOn,itstaysoncontinuallywhileyouare  
taking a video.  
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:  
1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, 320x240, or  
176x144.  
Settings:  
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the  
settings that you use the most.  
White balance: allows you to set this option to one of the  
followingchoices:Auto,Daylight,Cloudy,Incandescent,or  
Fluorescent.  
Flash:allowsyoutosettheflashoptionstoOfforOn. When  
yousettheflashtoOn,itstaysoncontinuallywhileyouare  
taking a video.  
Video quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.  
83  
Video Image Viewer Options  
Settings (continued):  
After you take a photo or shoot a video, you can access various  
options from the Pictures and Videos Image Viewer.  
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to  
take and save a mirror-image video when using self-  
recording mode.  
Video  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory  
card (if inserted).  
Reset:allowsyoutoresetallcameraorcamcordersettings  
to the default values.  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and  
the various viewing options for a selected video. Image  
viewer options are described in the following section. The  
last video you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail in  
the Image viewer icon.  
Return to  
previous page  
More  
Share  
Delete  
Available options are:  
Play  
: allows you to play a video  
Share: offers several ways to share your picture or video. Options are:  
AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Messaging, Wi-Fi, and  
YouTube.  
Multimedia  
84  
Delete  
Cancel  
More: allows you to do the following:  
:
.
allows you to delete the current picture. Tap OK to delete or  
only), Picasa (pictures only), S Memo (pictures only), Social Hub, Wi-Fi,  
or YouTube.  
Create folder: create a new sub-folder in the current folder. Can be on  
either the Phone or Memory Card.  
Play: allows you to play a video.  
Rename: allows you to rename a picture or video.  
Delete allows you to delete selected videos. Tap the checkmark, to turn  
:
Return to previous page  
(
): takes you back to the previously  
it green, next to any file or folder you want to delete, then tap Delete.  
View by: allows you to view the contents of the current folder as a list,  
as a list and details, or as thumbnails.  
active camera page where you can take another photo or shoot a new  
video.  
List by: allows you to view the contents of the current folder sorted by  
Time, Type, Name, or Size.  
Accessing Videos  
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder.  
You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in  
the Camera folder.  
More: provides you with the additional options: Move, Copy, Rename,  
and Settings.  
Move: allows you to move one or more videos to a different folder.  
Copy: allows you to copy one or more videos to a different folder.  
Rename: allows you to rename one or more video files.  
Settings: lets you set several general folder options:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Camera  
My Files  
DCIM  
.
2. Tap a video file to open it in the viewer and initiate  
• Show hidden files: causes files and folders that would normally be  
hidden to be displayed.  
playback.  
3. To pause the video, tap  
. To play the video, tap  
.
• Show file extension: causes file extensions to be displayed. For  
example, 3gp.  
Before you select a video to play, press  
to see the following options:  
in the Camera folder  
• Set Home Directory: allows you to choose and set the Home  
directory.  
Share: lets you share the selected videos with AllShare, Bluetooth,  
Calendar, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Messaging, Photo editor (pictures  
85  
 
Once you have selected a video to play, press  
following options:  
to display the  
Previous/Next  
to jump to the next video file in the Camera folder.  
Exit: to return to the videos list, press the key twice.  
:
tap  
to jump to the previously played video or tap  
Share via: to share the current video by way of AllShare, Messaging,  
YouTube, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Facebook, Gmail, or Email.  
Video brightness: allows you to set the screen brightness.  
Via Bluetooth: scans for a Bluetooth device on which to play the video.  
Subtitles allows you to see subtitles on shared media if available.  
:
Details: displays file information such as file name, format, resolution,  
and file size.  
While viewing a video, you can also adjust the screen view.  
Screen view allows you to select Original Size, Full-Screen, or  
Full-Screen in Ratio to view your video.  
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon that is  
displayed, is the mode that will appear after the icon is tapped.  
Original Size: (  
Full-Screen in Ratio View: (  
possible without becoming distorted.  
) the video will be played in its original size.  
) the video is enlarged as much as  
Full-Screen View: (  
some minor distortion.  
Pause/Resume: tap  
resume playing.  
)
the entire screen is used, which may cause  
to pause the video being played. Tap to  
Multimedia  
86  
Section 7: Messaging  
This section describes how to send and receive different types of  
messages. It also includes the features and functionality  
associated with messaging. You can also use the Messages App  
to bring your texts, calls, and voicemail messages together into a  
single conversation thread and you can access your messages  
from phone or computer.  
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service  
provider’s multimedia message service.  
Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a  
video clip to a text message changes the message from a text  
message to a multimedia message.  
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and  
indicate when messages are received and their type. For more  
Types of Messages  
Your phone provides the following message types:  
Text Messages  
Creating and Sending Messages  
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages  
Email and Gmail Messages  
Google Talk  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
New message  
.
Messages App  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging  
icon. If you  
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text  
messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.  
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service  
provider’s message service.  
delete it, or if you want to access Messaging from another Home  
screen, you must tap Applications  
Messaging  
.
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a  
recipient or tap  
Contacts.  
to select a recipient from your  
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and  
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio  
messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.  
3. If you tapped the  
icon, tap the Contacts, Recent,  
Groups, or Favorites tab. The Contacts tab is the default.  
87  
           
4. Tap the desired contact to place a checkmark, then tap  
Add  
Message Options  
Options before composing a message  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.  
.
2. Before composing a message, press  
to reveal  
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less than 10, all  
members in the group will be added. You will need to delete any  
unnecessary members in the list by selecting the trash can icon and  
deleting unwanted entries.  
additional messaging options:  
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for a  
certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the  
Messaging Search window and tap  
.
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with a semicolon  
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more  
(;) then using the previous procedure.  
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread. Select  
5. Tap the Tap to enter message field and use the on-screen  
the messages to delete and a green checkmark will appear next to  
the message. Tap Delete  
.
Options while composing a message  
1. While composing a message, press  
additional messaging options.  
6. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.  
to reveal  
7. Review your message and tap Send  
.
• Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy face  
to your message.  
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be automatically saved  
as a draft.  
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your Location, Contacts,  
S Memo, or Calendar. This is a convenient feature for adding  
names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your message. For more  
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.  
Messaging  
88  
     
Adding attachments to a message  
Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing your  
location.  
To add an attachment to your message tap  
of the following options:  
and select one  
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry, then  
add it to your message by tapping Add  
.
Pictures: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list to  
Adding Additional Text  
add it to your message.  
Take picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a photo  
with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by tapping  
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and events  
from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.  
Save  
Videos: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,  
then add it to your message  
.
1. While composing a message, press  
Add text.  
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:  
.
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the location  
on Google Maps.  
Capture video: allows you to temporarily exit the message, record  
a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it to your  
message by tapping Save  
Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the Audio  
.
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of any of  
your contacts to your message.  
• S Memo: allows you to add an entire S Memo to your message.  
list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to the right of  
the audio so that it turns green, then tapping OK  
.
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a calendar  
event to your message.  
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and record  
an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. When you tap Stop, the  
audio is automatically attached to the message.  
3. Tap the information you want to send. This will place a  
checkmark next to the item.  
S Memo: allows you to tap on an existing S Memo, then add it to  
your message.  
4. Tap Add  
.
The text is added to your message.  
Calendar: allows you to tap on an existing Calendar event, then  
add it to your message by tapping Add  
.
89  
 
which they were received, with the latest message displayed at  
the top.  
Viewing New Received Messages  
1. When you receive a new message, the new message  
icon will appear at the top of your screen.  
To open a threaded message follow these steps:  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For  
– or –  
Tap the message thread you want to view.  
2. Touch and hold the message thread to display the  
From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
then tap  
following options:  
the new message to view it.  
• View contact: displays the contact’s information. This option only  
displays if the sender is in your Contacts list.  
The selected message appears in the display.  
• Add to Contacts: displays the Contacts information screen. This  
option only displays if the sender is not in your Contacts list.  
3. To play a multimedia message, tap  
.
• Delete thread: displays a confirmation dialog box that when  
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap  
.
pressed, deletes the entire thread.  
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages  
have been added), touch the screen and in a single motion,  
scroll up or down the page.  
Deleting Messages  
Deleting a single message  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
Message Threads  
2. Tap the message that you want to delete.  
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into  
message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see all the  
messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and displays a  
contact on the screen. Message threads are listed in the order in  
3. Once the message screen is displayed, touch and hold the  
message, then tap Delete message  
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to cancel.  
.
Messaging  
90  
     
Deleting multiple messages  
Messaging Settings  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia  
messages, Voicemails, and Push messages.  
2. Press  
Delete threads.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark will  
Settings  
.
appear beside each message you select.  
2. The following Messaging settings are available:  
4. Tap Delete  
.
• Message font size: allows you to set the size of your message text  
to Use device font sizes, Huge, Large, Normal, Small, or Tiny.  
5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to cancel.  
• Background color: allows you to set the message background to  
Message Search  
You can search through your messages by using the Message  
Search feature.  
either black or white.  
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is  
reached, rather than having them overwritten.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
2. Tap Search  
.
Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text  
messages can be in one conversation.  
.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to  
multimedia messages can be in one conversation.  
search for.  
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the  
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.  
4. All messages that contain the search string you entered  
• Message Center: allows you to enter the number of your message  
center where your messages reside while the system is attempting  
to deliver them.  
are displayed.  
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text  
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic.  
91  
       
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve messages  
automatically.  
Creating an Email Account  
Note: If you want to set up a Corporate email account, see “Synchronizing a  
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,  
Restricted, or Warning.  
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content  
belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup screen  
displayed.  
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are  
creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content  
Domain.  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
Free: you may add any content to the message.  
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from the  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
network.  
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed, tap  
• CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB) messages.  
Show password to create a checkmark.  
• Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that you  
will receive CB messages on.  
5. Tap Next  
6. Enter an account name for this email account (optional).  
7. Tap Done  
.
• Language: allows you to select all of the languages that you want  
to receive CB messages in.  
.
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your  
status bar.  
Synchronizing a Corporate Email Account  
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message  
notifications.  
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to  
synchronize with a corporate email account.  
Using Email  
Email enables you to review and create email using various email  
services. You can also receive text message alerts when you  
receive an important email.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup screen  
displayed.  
Messaging  
92  
             
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
Creating Additional Email Accounts  
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first  
account, follow these steps:  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
4. If you want to use this email with Social Hub, tap Set as  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
premium account to create a checkmark.  
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from the  
active account.  
5. If you want to see your password as it is being typed, tap  
Show password to create a checkmark.  
2. Tap the box in the upper left corner of your screen that  
displays the optional name you assigned to your first email  
account, for example, Work, Gmail, etc.  
6. Scroll down and tap Manual setup  
.
7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.  
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,  
Your Email account screen is displayed.  
Username and Password, then tap Next  
9. At the prompt tap OK  
.
3. Press  
Add account then enter the information  
.
required to set up another account. For more information,  
The Account options screen is displayed.  
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields, then  
Switching Between Email Accounts  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
tap Next  
.
.
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional).  
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from the  
active account.  
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.  
12. Tap Done  
.
13. Press  
More  
Account Settings to change the  
account settings.  
93  
   
2. Tap the box in the upper left corner of your screen that  
displays the optional name you assigned to your first email  
account, for example, Work, Gmail, etc.  
Refreshing Gmail  
Press  
Refresh to send and receive new emails and  
synchronize your email with the Gmail account.  
Your Email account screen is displayed.  
Creating a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, press  
Compose.  
3. In the Accounts section, tap the Email account you would  
like to switch to.  
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.  
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a  
comma.  
4. The new Email account is displayed.  
Using Gmail  
3. Tap  
copy.  
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind  
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the  
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the synchronization  
settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized with your Gmail  
account.  
4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.  
5. Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your  
Signing into Your Gmail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
message.  
Gmail  
.
6. Tap  
to send.  
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access Gmail.  
Viewing a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.  
2. Sign in if you have a Google account, or tap Create an  
2. the following options are available:  
account and tap OK  
.
• Archive: archives the selected Email.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Delete: deletes the Email.  
The Inbox loads conversations and email.  
Messaging  
94  
       
• Next  
• Previous  
3. Press  
:
displays the next Email in your inbox.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Talk  
.
:
displays the previous Email in your inbox.  
2. Press Next to set up a Google account or to Sign in.  
to select one of the following additional options:  
3. Tap Create to create a new Google account.  
– or –  
• Change labels: changes the label on the email or conversation.  
• Mark unread: unread messages or threads with unread messages  
display in boldface text in the Inbox.  
Tap Sign in if you have an existing Google account.  
• Go to inbox: returns you to your Gmail Inbox.  
4. After entering your user name and password, press the  
• Mute: mutes the conversation (Email thread).  
Down Navigation key.  
• Add/Remove star: click a message's star to add or remove the  
star (just like clicking flags in Outlook).  
5. Tap Sign in  
.
6. Begin using Google Talk.  
• More  
:
Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.  
Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This could take up to  
Settings: displays Email settings that you can modify.  
5 minutes to complete.  
Help: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the web  
for help.  
Messages App  
Select text: allows you to copy text to your clipboard.  
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail messages  
together into a single conversation thread and is accessible by  
phone or computer.  
Google Talk  
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This  
allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail  
accounts.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Messages  
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
95  
       
Note: The first time you use the Messages app, you will need to download  
the updated application from the Market. When the Market page  
3. The first time you use Messages, you will need to set up a  
few things. Tap Record Greeting to record a personal  
greeting, or tap Skip if you want to do it later.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Messages  
app.  
Messaging  
96  
Section 8: Changing Your Settings  
This section explains the sound and phone settings for your  
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory,  
and any extra settings associated with your phone.  
Activating Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
and network  
Wi-Fi settings.  
Wireless and Network  
Airplane mode  
2. Tap Wi-Fi. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi is  
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features,  
such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane  
or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is  
prohibited.  
Network Notification  
By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the  
Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi  
network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to  
receive notifications.  
Important!: When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive  
any calls or access online information or applications.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network  
Settings  
Wireless  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Wi-Fi settings  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
.
2. Tap Airplane mode. A check mark displayed next to the  
2. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to  
feature indicates Airplane mode is active. The Airplane  
the feature indicates Network notification is active.  
mode icon  
is displayed at the top of your screen.  
3. Tap Network notification again to remove the checkmark  
and deactivate this feature.  
97  
         
WPS Button Connection  
2. Tap Auto connect to create a check mark.  
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button is a standard for easy  
and secure wireless network set up and connections. To use  
WPS, the connecting device must support WPS and be  
compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. WPS can  
automatically set up a random network name and WPA wireless  
security for wireless Wi-Fi phones, routers, access points,  
computers, adapters, and other electronic devices.  
Auto connect is enabled.  
Activating Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
and network Wi-Fi Direct settings  
.
WPS allows you to push buttons instead of entering a network  
name and wireless security PIN.  
2. On your phone, at the Scan for devices prompt, tap OK. Tap  
the Do not show again checkbox if you want to skip this  
step in the future.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Wi-Fi settings  
2. Tap WPS button connection  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
3. Tap Wi-Fi Direct. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi  
.
3. Press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi access point within 2  
minutes.  
Bluetooth settings  
Auto connect  
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device  
name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can  
discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with  
which to pair.  
The Auto connect option allows you to be automatically  
connected to an AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone  
detects it.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Wi-Fi settings  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
Changing Your Settings  
98  
 
Activating Bluetooth  
phone becomes invisible again.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
Visible time-out  
and network  
Bluetooth settings and tap Bluetooth to turn  
Visible time-out option allows you to make your device visible for  
a certain time limit and become invisible. This option can only be  
accessed when your device is set to Visible.  
it on.  
Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Bluetooth settings and tap Visible time-out  
5 minutes 1 hour, or Never  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
Device Name  
2. Tap 2 minutes  
,
,
.
Scan for Devices  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Bluetooth settings and tap Device name  
The assigned device name displays.  
3. Press to erase the current device name and enter a  
Settings  
Wireless  
This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you  
can pair with them.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
and network Bluetooth settings and tap Scan for devices  
.
Your phone begins scanning and lists any discovered  
devices in the Bluetooth devices section.  
new name for this device using the keyboard.  
4. Press OK to confirm your setting.  
2. Tap a device name to pair with the device.  
Visible  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
Important!: Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to  
confirm and pair with them.  
and network Bluetooth settings and tap Visible  
.
The phone is now activated for discovery for 119 seconds  
so you can pair with another device. After 119 seconds the  
3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and  
tap OK  
.
99  
USB utilities  
2. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the  
feature. The USB tethering icon  
of your screen.  
is displayed at the top  
This option allows you to copy files between your PC and the  
memory card in your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network USB utilities  
2. On your phone, tap Connect storage to PC  
Settings  
Wireless  
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Tethering and portable hotspots  
2. Tap Portable Wi-Fi hotspot settings  
3. Read the introduction and tap OK  
4. Tap Portable Wi-Fi hotspot to add a checkmark and activate  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
.
3. Connect a USB cable from your phone to your PC.  
.
4. A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected. Tap  
.
Connect USB storage  
.
Your phone will appear on your PC as a removable disk.  
the feature. The Portable Wi-Fi hotspot icon  
displayed at the top of your screen.  
is  
5. Open the folder to view files.  
5. Tap Configure portable Wi-Fi hotspot  
6. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Security setting and  
Password and tap Save  
.
6. Copy files between your PC and your memory card.  
7. To exit, tap Disconnect storage from PC  
.
.
Tethering & portable hotspot  
7. Tap Hide my device to create a checkmark if you want your  
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data  
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
device hidden.  
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other devices  
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to your  
phone.  
Tethering  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
and network Tethering and portable hotspots  
.
Changing Your Settings  
100  
 
2. Find [Galaxy Note_xxxx] in the Wi-Fi network list and  
connect to it (xxxx are four numbers that are automatically  
generated by your phone).  
To establish a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol):  
1. Tap Add PPTP VPN  
2. Tap VPN name, add a name for this connection using the  
keypad, then tap OK  
3. Tap Set VPN server, add a name using the keypad, then tap  
OK  
.
The connected device can now use internet through your  
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
.
.
Note: Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be different  
4. Tap Enable Encryption to make a checkmark (if desired).  
depending on the type of device.  
5. Tap DNS search domains, add a name for DNS search using  
VPN settings  
the keypad, then tap OK  
To establish a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol):  
1. Tap Add L2TP VPN  
2. Tap VPN name, add a name for this connection using the  
keypad, then tap OK  
3. Tap Set VPN server, add a name using the keypad, then tap  
OK  
.
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual  
Private Networks (VPNs).  
.
Important!: Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one.  
Adding a VPN  
.
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to  
use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2  
Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based  
L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).  
.
4. Tap Enable L2TP secret to make a checkmark (if desired).  
5. Tap Set L2TP secret and enter a password (if desired), then  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
tap OK  
.
and network  
VPN settings.  
2. Tap Add VPN  
.
101  
6. Tap DNS search domains, add a name for DNS search using  
the keypad, then tap OK  
3. Tap Set VPN server, add a name using the keypad, then tap  
OK  
.
.
4. Tap Enable L2TP secret to make a checkmark (if desired).  
To establish a L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based L2TP/  
IPSec):  
5. Tap Set L2TP secret and enter a password (if desired), then  
1. Tap Add L2TP/IPSec PSK VPN  
2. Tap VPN name, add a name for this connection using the  
keypad, then tap OK  
3. Tap Set VPN server, add a name using the keypad, then tap  
OK  
4. Tap Set IPsec pre-shared key, enter a key and tap OK  
.
tap OK  
6. Tap Set user certificate, then tap OK  
7. Tap Set CA certificate, then tap OK  
8. Tap DNS search domains, add a name for DNS search using  
the keypad, then tap OK  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Mobile networks  
5. Tap Enable L2TP secret to make a checkmark (if desired).  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your  
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the  
Mobile networks options.  
6. Tap Set L2TP secret and enter a password (if desired), then  
tap OK  
7. Tap DNS search domains, add a name for DNS search using  
the keypad, then tap OK  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
and network Mobile networks  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
.
The following options display:  
To establish a L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/  
IPSec):  
Use Packet Data  
1. Tap Add L2TP/IPSec CRT VPN  
2. Tap VPN name, add a name for this connection using the  
keypad, then tap OK  
.
To activate the data network, this option must be selected. It is  
set on by default.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
Changing Your Settings  
102  
Network Operators  
and network  
Mobile networks.  
Using this feature you can view the current network connection.  
You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set  
the network selection to Automatic.  
2. Tap Use packet data to create a checkmark and activate  
the feature.  
Data Roaming  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Mobile networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
Settings  
Wireless  
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s  
partner networks and access data services when you are out of  
your service providers area of coverage.  
.
.
The current network connection displays at the bottom of  
the list.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Mobile networks  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate the  
Important!: You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an  
available network.  
feature.  
Access Point Names  
3. Tap Search networks to manually search for a network.  
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point  
(hotspot).  
4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network  
connection.  
From the Home screen, tap  
and network Mobile networks  
Settings  
Wireless  
Access Point Names  
.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.  
A list of the Access Point names display. The active access  
point displays a green, filled circle to the right of the name.  
Default setup options  
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically search  
for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to  
select a network each time you connect.  
103  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Mobile networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
3. Tap Default setup  
Settings  
Wireless  
Set reject messages  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Set reject messages  
.
.
.
2. Tap  
– or –  
to manually add a reject message.  
.
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed when  
you want the call to be rejected.  
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually,  
or tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select  
a network.  
3. Tap Save  
.
Call Settings  
To access the Call settings menu:  
Call alert  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Call alert  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
Call rejection  
Settings  
Call.  
2. Tap Answer vibration to enable your phone to vibrate when  
the called party answers the phone.  
3. Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a call  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Call rejection  
2. Tap Auto reject mode to enable your phone to reject calls.  
3. Select Off All numbers, or Auto reject numbers  
4. Tap Auto reject list  
5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.  
.
then tap OK  
.
4. Tap Alerts on call to set the alert type.  
,
.
Call answering/ending  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Call answering/ending.  
.
2. The following options are available:  
• Answering key: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming calls  
by pressing the Home key.  
6. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically  
reject all unknown calls.  
Changing Your Settings  
104  
   
• Automatic answering: Tap this option if you are using a headset  
and want the call to be automatically answered. Select the time  
interval before the call is automatically answered.  
• Forward when busy allows you to forward voice calls to a  
designated number instead of your Voicemail number if you are on  
another phone call.  
• The Power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a call  
• Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls to a  
designated number instead of your voicemail number when there is  
no answer on your phone. You can also select the amount of time  
that the phone delays before forwarding.  
by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.  
Turn on proximity sensor  
From the Call Settings menu, tap Turn on proximity sensor  
.
• Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls to a  
designated number instead of your voicemail number when you are  
not in an area covered by your service provider or when your phone  
is switched off.  
When you answer a call, the screen will be turned off to  
save power.  
Additional settings  
TTY Mode  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Additional settings  
.
This menu is used to activate or deactivate TTY Mode for this  
device.  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap TTY mode  
.
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be displayed.  
Select Network Default, Hide number, or Show number.  
2. Tap Full TTY. A green checkmark will appear. Tap TTY mode  
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone is  
trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.  
off to turn it off.  
Call forwarding  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Call forwarding  
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call was  
either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.  
.
• Noise suppression: Your phone is equipped with an advanced  
voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by  
suppressing background noise, intermittent sounds (like a siren or  
nearby conversation), and echoes, allowing you to hear and be  
heard nearly anywhere. Tap to activate.  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls.  
105  
 
• Fixed Dialing Numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a  
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.  
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.  
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.  
limited set of phone numbers.  
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers  
Enabling FDN  
Managing the FDN List  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Additional settings  
Fixed Dialing Numbers  
2. Tap Enable FDN  
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone  
numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.  
.
.
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be created.  
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
FDN is enabled.  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Additional settings  
Fixed Dialing Numbers  
2. Tap FDN list  
.
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Disable FDN  
,
enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.  
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this  
menu does not display.  
Voicemail Service  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect  
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer  
service for assistance.  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Voicemail Service  
.
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the default.  
Changing the PIN2 Code  
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Additional settings  
Fixed Dialing Numbers  
2. Tap Change PIN2  
Voicemail  
.
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this menu.  
1. From the Call Settings menu, tap Voicemail  
Changing Your Settings  
.
.
106  
2. Tap the Voicemail number field, backspace to erase the  
3. Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode (the  
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the  
current mode displays).  
keypad, then tap OK  
.
Vibration  
3. Tap OK  
.
Vibration mode allows your phone to vibrate instead of a  
producing a tone.  
Sound Settings  
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Vibration  
2. Tap Always  
silent mode  
Volume  
Settings  
Sound  
.
From the Home screen, tap Settings Sound.  
,
Never, Only in silent mode, or Only when not in  
The following options display:  
.
Silent mode  
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from  
making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the  
speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of  
incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a defined  
tone or sound as an alert.  
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all phone  
sounds in one easy location.  
1. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume for  
Incoming calls, Media, System, and Notification.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Sound.  
2. Tap OK  
.
2. Tap Silent mode  
.
Vibration Intensity  
– or –  
Set the intensity of vibration for Incoming call, Notification, and  
Haptic feedback.  
From the Home screen, press the Lock key until Phone  
options displays.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Vibration intensity  
Settings  
Sound  
.
107  
   
2. Touch one of the three vibration intensity options and drag  
2. Tap Audible touch tones, Audible selection, or Screen lock  
the slider to set.  
sounds. A check mark displayed next to these features  
indicates active status.  
3. Touch OK to save your setting.  
Haptic feedback  
Phone ringtone  
Instead of sounding a tone, the Haptic feedback option vibrates  
when you press soft keys on certain screens. You can also set the  
intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting.  
This option allows you to set the ringtone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Phone ringtone  
Settings  
Sound  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Sound.  
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
2. Tap Haptic feedback. A check mark displayed next to the  
Notification ringtone  
feature indicates Haptic feedback is active.  
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for  
notifications and alarms.  
Display Settings  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display  
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock  
feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power saving  
mode, and tv out settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Notification ringtone  
Settings  
Sound  
.
.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
The following options display:  
Settings  
Display.  
Audible Tone Settings  
The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used  
when you use the dialing pad, make a screen selection, or lock  
your screen. Each time you press a key, make a selection, or lock  
your phone, the selected tone sounds.  
• Screen display: allows you to set the Font style, the Home screen  
and Lock screen Wallpaper, Clock, Weather, Weather settings, and  
Clock and weather position.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Sound.  
Changing Your Settings  
108  
   
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap Automatic  
brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust and tap OK.  
• System power saving: uses the default power settings. Settings  
will be enabled immediately when this option is selected.  
• Auto-rotate screen: allows you to switch the display orientation  
• Custom power saving: allows you to customize your power  
settings. Settings will be enabled immediately when this option is  
selected.  
automatically when you rotate the phone.  
• Animation: determines whether some or all of the window  
elements animate. Selections are: No animations, Some  
animations, and All animations.  
• Custom power saving settings: allows you to customize your  
power settings. After selecting Custom power saving the following  
options are enabled after you tap Custom power saving settings  
.
• Screen time-out: adjusts the delay time before the screen  
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1  
minute, 2 minutes, and 10 minutes.  
Power saving on at: allows you to set the percentage of battery power  
remaining that Power saving will begin. Choose between 10%-50%.  
Turn off Wi-Fi: automatically turns off Wi-Fi when you are not  
connected with Mobile AP.  
Touch key light duration: allows you to set the time that the touch  
keys located on the bottom of your phone are lit.  
Turn off Bluetooth: automatically turns off Bluetooth when it is not in  
• Auto adjust screen power: allows you to save power because the  
phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the LCD  
brightness.  
use.  
Turn off GPS: automatically turns off GPS when it is not in use.  
Turn off Sync: automatically turns off Sync when the phone is not  
• Gyroscope calibration: allows you to calibrate the gyro sensors.  
synchronizing with the server.  
Place your device on a level surface and tap Calibrate  
.
Brightness: allows you to manually adjust the brightness of the screen.  
Tap this option to enable the next Brightness option.  
Power Saving  
Power Saving allows you to manage your phone to conserve  
power.  
Brightness: allows you to set the Brightness percentage of the screen.  
Screen time-out: allows you to set the time before the screen times  
out and goes into lock mode.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
saving  
2. The following options are available:  
Settings  
Power  
• Learn about power saving: describes various ways to conserve  
battery power.  
.
109  
 
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and security  
Settings  
Location  
Location and Security  
The Location and Security settings allow you to set up how the  
phone will determine your location and the security settings for  
your phone.  
.
2. Tap Use sensor aiding to enable the positioning sensors.  
Set screen lock  
Use Wireless Networks  
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the  
phone.  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your  
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use  
wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and security  
Settings  
Location  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and security  
Settings  
Location  
2. Tap Set screen lock and select one of the following options:  
.
• None: disables screen unlock security.  
2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information  
• Pattern: requires that you draw a pattern on the screen to unlock it.  
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
using the wireless network.  
Use GPS satellites  
• PIN: requires that you enter a numeric PIN number to unlock the  
screen. Enter a PIN number, confirm it, then tap OK.  
This option allows you to locate locations accurately to street  
level. To conserve power, deselect this option when not in use.  
• Password: requires that you enter a password to unlock the  
screen. Enter a password, confirm it, then tap OK. Password must  
contain at least one letter.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and security  
Settings  
Location  
.
Note: Once you have set the screen lock option, the Set screen lock option  
2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.  
changes to Change screen lock  
.
Use sensor aiding  
Disable USB debugging mode  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
This options enhances the positioning capabilities of your phone  
and conserves power using sensors.  
Settings  
Location  
110  
Changing Your Settings  
     
and security  
.
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK.  
2. Tap the Disable USB debugging mode checkbox to create a  
checkmark. This is necessary when device encryption is  
enabled.  
Visible passwords  
When you create a phone password you can also configure the  
phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an  
asterisk (*).  
Set up SIM card lock  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and security  
Settings  
Location  
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make  
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your  
SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.  
.
2. Tap Visible passwords to create a checkmark and activate  
this feature.  
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each time  
you use the phone. Using this option you can also change your  
SIM PIN number.  
Set up/Change password  
Use this option to set up your password when one is first required  
or change your current password.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and security  
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock  
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap OK  
Settings  
Location  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and security Set up/Change password  
2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm  
3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm  
Settings  
Location  
.
.
.
.
.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN  
code.  
Select device administrators  
4. Tap Change SIM PIN  
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK  
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
111  
.
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or  
more administration applications that control your device for  
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of stolen).  
.
.
These applications enforce remote or local device security  
policies.  
and security.  
2. Tap Use secure credentials to activate this feature. A check  
mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure  
credentials is active.  
Some of the features a device administration application might  
control are:  
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the device is  
restored to factory settings.  
3. Tap Install from USB storage to install encrypted certificates  
from USB storage.  
Automatically locking the device.  
Restoring factory settings on the device.  
4. Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage  
password.  
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration applications, the  
strictest policy is enforced.  
5. Tap Clear storage to clear the storage (SD card or phone  
memory) of all contents and reset the credentials  
password.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and security  
2. Tap Select device administrators  
Settings  
Location  
.
Applications  
.
This device can be used for Android development. You can write  
applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run  
the applications using the hardware, system, and network. This  
feature allows you to configure the device for development.  
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If no  
device administrators are listed, you can download them  
from the Android Market.  
Credential storage  
Warning!: Android Dev Phone 1 devices are not intended for non-developer  
end-users. Because the device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other  
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.  
This option allows certain applications to access secure  
certificates and other credentials. Certificates and credentials  
can be installed to the SD card and password protected.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Location  
Changing Your Settings  
112  
 
Clearing application cache and data  
Unknown sources  
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market  
applications.  
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this  
feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Applications  
2. Tap Unknown sources  
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
Applications Manage applications  
.
.
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.  
3. Tap Clear data or Clear Cache  
.
Manage Applications  
Uninstalling third-party applications  
This feature allows you to manage installed applications. You can  
view and control currently running services, or use the device for  
application development. Using the Samsung Apps option the  
device notifies you when you are using Wi-Fi or Packet data for  
Samsung applications.  
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this  
feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Applications Manage applications  
.
You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as  
well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the  
applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.  
2. Tap the application you want to uninstall and tap Uninstall  
.
3. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Applications  
Settings  
4. At the Uninstall finished prompt, tap OK  
.
Manage applications  
.
113  
Running services  
4. Tap the On SD card tab to see the memory usage for  
applications that are stored on your SD card.  
The Running services option allows you to view and control  
currently running services such as DataService, Google Talk, SNS  
(messaging), Swype, and more.  
Battery usage  
The Battery usage option allows you to view the battery usage of  
the applications and features on your phone.  
To stop a service from running on your phone:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Applications Running services  
2. Tap a service.  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Applications Battery usage  
2. Press Refresh to refresh the display.  
Settings  
.
.
3. Tap Stop to stop the service from running on your phone.  
Development  
Storage usage  
From the Home screen, tap  
Applications Development  
Settings  
The Storage usage option allows you to view the memory usage  
for your applications.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Applications Storage usage  
Settings  
Important!: These features are used for development purposes only.  
.
USB debugging  
The Memory usage for the different applications that are  
present on your phone are displayed.  
This feature is used for development purposes only.  
Allow mock locations  
2. Tap the Running tab to see the memory usage for  
This feature is used for development purposes only.  
applications that are presently running.  
If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using  
this device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different  
3. Tap the Downloaded tab to see the memory usage for  
Downloaded applications.  
Changing Your Settings  
114  
GPS locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock”  
the coordinates.  
• Tilt to zoom: allows you to use the Tilt feature to reduce or enlarge  
the screen when in Gallery or Browser. Tap Tilt to create a  
checkmark then tap Sensitivity, then set the sensitivity using the  
slider. Tap Learn about tilt for more information.  
Accounts and Synchronization  
1. Sign in to your Google account.  
• Pan to edit: allows you to use the Panning feature to move icons  
from one page to another in Home and Application edit mode.  
Tap Panning to create a checkmark, then tap Sensitivity, then set  
the sensitivity using the slider. Tap Learn about panning for more  
information.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
and sync  
Settings  
Accounts  
.
3. From the General sync settings section, tap one of the  
• Shake to update: allows you to use the Shake feature to scan for  
Bluetooth devices.Tap Shake to create a checkmark. Tap Learn  
about shake for more information.  
following options:  
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the  
background.  
Turn over to mute: allows you to mute incoming calls and sounds  
by turning your phone over. Tap Turn over to create a checkmark  
and activate. Tap Learn about turn over for more information.  
• Auto-sync: automatically synchronizes your data with the phone.  
4. From the Manage accounts section, tap on an open  
account to set the account settings or tap on Add account  
to add a new account.  
Privacy  
The Privacy settings allow you to backup your data, perform an  
automatic restore of your backed up data and settings, and reset  
the phone to the factory default settings.  
Motion  
The Motion settings allow you to set up various Motion activation  
services.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Privacy.  
Back up my data  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Motion.  
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of your  
settings and data.  
2. Tap Motion activation to activate the feature. A checkmark  
is displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Privacy.  
3. The following options are available:  
115  
       
2. Tap Back up my data  
.
5. At the confirmation screen, tap Erase everything.  
The phone resets to the factory default settings  
A green checkmark will appear.  
automatically and when finished, displays the Home  
screen.  
Automatic restore  
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of  
your backed up settings and data will be restored.  
Warning!: Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data from your phone  
and internal SD card, including your Google account, system and  
application data and settings, and downloaded applications. It will  
not erase current system software, bundled applications, and  
external SD card files such as music and photos unless you check  
the Format USB storage checkbox.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Automatic restore  
A green checkmark will appear.  
Settings  
Privacy.  
.
Storage  
Factory data reset  
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the  
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD card.  
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to  
the factory default settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Factory data reset  
Settings  
Privacy  
.
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card,  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings Storage.  
3. If you want to erase all data on your USB storage, such as  
music and photos, tap the Format USB storage checkbox to  
create a green checkmark.  
SD card  
The available memory displays under the Total space and  
Available space headings for your SD card.  
4. Tap Reset phone  
.
1. Touch Unmount SD card to prepare the memory card for  
safe removal or formatting.  
Changing Your Settings  
116  
   
2. Touch Format SD card to erase the memory card and  
Select Input Method  
prepare it for use with your phone.  
There are three input methods available: Swype, Android  
keyboard, and Samsung keypad. Samsung keypad is the default  
text input method.  
USB storage  
The available memory displays under the Total space and  
Available space headings for your USB storage.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Language  
and keyboard Select Input Method  
.
Tap Format USB storage to erase all data on the phone’s  
USB storage such as music and photos.  
2. Select either Android keyboard, Samsung keypad, or  
Swype.  
System memory  
Swype Settings  
The available memory displays under the Available space heading  
for your System memory.  
To configure Swype settings:  
Language and keyboard  
This setting allows you to configure the language in which to  
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and keyboard Swype  
Settings  
Language  
.
2. Tap one of the following Swype settings to activate the  
From the Home screen, tap  
and keyboard  
Select language  
Settings  
Language  
setting:  
.
• Select Input Method: allows you to switch between different  
keyboard types.  
• How to Swype: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype.  
To set the language that the menus display on the phone:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings Language  
and keyboard Select language  
2. Tap on a language from the list.  
• Personal dictionary: Allows you to setup and manage your own  
dictionary.  
.
• Preferences: Allows you to view and modify the following Swype  
options:  
117  
         
Audio feedback: When enabled, plays sounds as you enter text.  
Vibrate on keypress: check this field to have the phone vibrate  
• Sound on keypress: check this field to play a sound each time you  
touch a key on the keyboard.  
each time you touch a key on the keyboard.  
• Popup on keypress: check this field to show a small popup of each  
character that you type.  
Show tips: When enabled, the device displays helpful tips.  
Auto-spacing: When enabled, inserts spaces automatically when you  
pause entering text.  
Touch to correct words: check this field to touch and highlight  
words that you want to correct.  
Auto-capitalization: When enabled, automatically capitalizes the first  
letter of the first word in a sentence.  
• Auto-capitalization: check this field to have the keyboard  
automatically capitalize the first letter of the first word after a period,  
the first word in a text field, and all words in name fields.  
Show complete trace: When enabled, briefly display the Swype trace.  
Word suggestion: When enabled, suggests possible matching words  
as you enter text.  
• Show settings key: allows you to select how the settings key will  
be displayed.  
Speed vs. accuracy: Send the sensitivity of Swype text recognition.  
• Voice input: check this field to be able to enter text in a message  
by talking.  
Reset Swype’s dictionary: Deletes all of the words you have added  
and loads the default dictionary.  
• Input languages: tap on a language that you want to input.  
Version: View the current Swype software version.  
• Quickfixes: check this field to automatically correct some common  
misspellings as you type.  
• Language Options: Allows you to set the language that you will be  
using.  
• Show suggestions: check this field to show suggested words in a  
field above the keyboard as you type.  
Android Keyboard settings  
• Auto-complete: check this field to automatically enter a suggested  
word, shown in orange in the field above the keyboard, when you  
enter a space or punctuation.  
From this menu you can set Android keyboard options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and keyboard Android keyboard  
2. The following options are available:  
Settings  
Language  
.
Samsung Keypad settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keypad options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings Language  
• Vibrate on keypress: check this field to have the phone vibrate  
each time you touch a key on the keyboard.  
Changing Your Settings  
118  
 
and keyboard  
Samsung keypad  
.
10. Tap Auto-full stop to activate the Auto-full stop feature.  
When you double space in a message, a period and space  
is added and the keyboard is placed into Uppercase mode  
so you can start the new sentence with a capital letter.  
2. Tap Portrait keypad types and select a text input method:  
Qwerty Keypad  
3x4 Keypad  
11. Tap Character preview to enable small pop-ups to appear  
as you tap each key to show the character you are  
entering.  
3. Tap Input language then tap one of the languages.  
4. Tap Pen detection to display the handwriting pad whenever  
the S Pen is detected.  
12. Tap Handwriting settings to select options for using the  
5. To use XT9 Predictive text method, tap XT9  
.
Handwriting feature.  
6. If you are using XT9 Predictive text method, tap XT9  
13. Tap Tutorial for a short tutorial on using the Samsung  
keypad.  
14. Tap Reset all settings to reset all Samsung keypad settings  
7. Tap Keypad sweeping to be able to sweep the keypad and  
to the default values.  
change from ABC to?123 mode.  
XT9 Advanced Settings  
8. Tap Auto-capitalization to enable automatic capitalization.  
The following XT9 Advanced settings are only available if the XT9  
field has been selected.  
9. Tap Voice input to activate the Voice input feature. Voice  
input is an experimental feature using Google’s networked  
speech recognition application.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and keyboard Samsung keypad  
settings  
Settings  
Language  
XT9 advanced  
.
119  
 
2. Tap the Word completion field to enable word completion.  
Your phone will predict how to complete the word you have  
started.  
9. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary:  
Tap the XT9 my words field, then press  
Add. Enter  
the new word in the Edit XT9 my words field, then tap Add  
10. To add words to substitute (for example youve becomes  
you’ve) tap XT9 auto-substitution  
11. A list of substitutions is displayed. If you don’t see the  
substitution you want, press Add, and then input  
.
3. Tap the Word completion point field to set how many letters  
should be entered before a prediction is made.  
.
4. Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects  
typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible  
words that reflect the characters of the keys you tapped as  
well as the characters of nearby keys.  
the Shortcut word and Substitution word. Tap Add  
.
Voice Input and Output  
5. Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word prediction  
This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of on-  
screen data such as messages and incoming caller information.  
for the next word.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and output  
Settings  
Voice input  
6. Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace  
words that you are typing. This option will help for  
accidental misspellings.  
.
2. Tap Voice recognition to and tap on the Voice recognition  
format that you want. Select Samsung powered by Vlingo or  
7. Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the  
device to automatically correct mistyped words according  
to normal spelling for your region.  
Google  
.
3. Tap Voice recognition settings to access the following  
options:  
8. Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to re-  
display the word suggestion list when you select the wrong  
word from the list.  
• Language: allows you set the language you will be using for your  
voice input and output.  
Changing Your Settings  
120  
 
• SafeSearch: allows you to filter explicit images when performing  
voice searches. You can set to Off, Moderate, or Strict.  
• Samsung TTS: allows you to modify settings for the Samsung TTS  
default engine.  
• Block offensive words: allows you to hide recognized offensive  
words.  
• Pico TTS: allows you to modify settings for the Pico TTS default  
engine.  
4. Tap Text-to-speech settings to access the following  
Accessibility Settings  
options:  
This service is able to collect all the text you type, including  
personal data credit card numbers except passwords. It may also  
log your user interface interactions. Using TalkBack, every  
interaction and keypress is explained in audio. The Accessibility  
menu also allows you to set various vision, hearing, and access  
options.  
• Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-to-  
speech feature sounds like on your device when activated.  
• Driving mode: allows incoming calls and new notifications to be  
read out automatically.  
• Driving mode settings: allows you to choose exactly what  
information is read out automatically.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accessibility  
Settings  
• Always use my settings: accepts an override of application  
settings with personal configurations for this text-to-speech settings  
screen. If enabled, your device defaults to using the text-to-speech  
feature.  
.
2. Tap Accessibility to create a checkmark and activate the  
feature.  
• Default engine: displays the default engine used for voice  
3. Tap TalkBack to create a checkmark and activate the  
recognition.  
feature.  
• Install voice data: confirms the installation of necessary data  
required for voice synthesis.  
If an Attention prompt appears, tap OK to continue or  
• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by  
Cancel to exit.  
the device. Choose from: Very slow  
,
Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very  
fast.  
4. Tap Font size to change the text size in the Calendar, Email,  
• Language: assigns the language used for verbal readout. Tap a  
language option.  
Contacts, and Messaging applications.  
121  
 
5. Tap Assistive light to turn on the torch to see better.  
3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the  
Month Day, and Year then tap Set  
,
.
6. Tap Mono audio to provide mono audio when listening with  
one earphone.  
4. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.  
7. Tap Call answering/ending to access the following options:  
5. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and  
Minute. Tap PM or AM, then tap Set  
.
• Answering key: Tap this option to create a checkmark if you want  
to accept incoming calls by pressing the home key.  
6. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the  
• Automatic answering: This option allows you to set the number of  
seconds before a call is automatically answered. You can also turn  
it off (default).  
phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.  
7. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.  
• The Power key ends calls: Tap this option to create a checkmark if  
you want to press the power key to end calls. This will not turn off  
the screen.  
Pen Settings  
This menu allows you to change settings for your S Pen.  
8. Tap Accessibility shortcut to press and hold the power key  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
settings  
2. Tap Dominant hand and tap either Left handed or Right  
handed  
Settings  
Pen  
to use the accessibility shortcut under phone options.  
.
Date and Time  
This menu allows you to change the current time and date  
displayed.  
.
3. Tap Pen help for information concerning your S Pen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
time  
Settings  
Date &  
.
2. Tap Automatic to allow the network set the date and time.  
Important!: Deactivate Automatic to manually set the rest of the options.  
Changing Your Settings  
122  
       
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this  
About Phone  
handset.  
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial  
information, and other phone information such as the model  
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version, and  
software build number.  
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this handset.  
• Build number: displays the software, build number.  
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used for updates to  
the handset or support. For additional information please contact your  
AT&T service representative.  
To access phone information:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
About  
phone. The following information displays:  
Software Update  
• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery  
(percentage), the phone number for this device, the network  
connection, signal strength, mobile network type, service state,  
roaming status, mobile network state, IMEI number, IMEISV, Wi-Fi  
MAC address, Bluetooth address, and Up time.  
The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to  
connect to the network and upload any new phone software  
directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the  
latest available software when you access this option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
update  
2. Tap Check for updates  
Settings  
Software  
• Battery usage: displays the applications or services (in  
percentages) that are using battery power.  
.
• Legal information: This option displays information about Open  
source licenses as well as Google legal information. This  
.
information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal  
information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service, Terms of  
Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more pertinent  
information as a reference. Read the information and terms, then  
3. At the Software update prompt, tap OK to continue.  
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if  
available), otherwise, when the Current software is up to  
press  
to return to the Settings menu.  
date prompt is displayed, tap OK  
.
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.  
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this  
handset.  
123  
   
5. When updating software, once the update file is  
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start screen  
by postponing it for a certain period of time. If you want to  
resume the update before the selected time, tap Continue  
update  
.
Changing Your Settings  
124  
Section 9: Connections  
This section describes the various connections your phone can  
make including accessing the Internet with your Browser, Wi-Fi,  
Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC.  
Zooming in and out of the Browser  
There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser. After  
tapping on a link or article, use one of these methods:  
Browser  
Tilting: Touch and hold the screen at two points then tilt the device  
back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You must first enable  
motion in the Settings section. For more information, refer to  
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section  
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to the  
basic features.  
Double tap: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to zoom in  
or out.  
Accessing the Mobile Web  
To access the Browser:  
Pinching: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to zoom in or  
out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion).  
From the Home screen, tap Web  
.
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.  
Desktop view  
To view a web page in Desktop view, scroll to the bottom to  
Navigating with the Browser  
1. To select an item, tap an entry.  
View: Mobile | Desktop and tap Desktop  
.
Browser Options  
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your  
1. From the home page, press  
options:  
to access the following  
finger in an up or down motion.  
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across a  
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse multiple  
web page.  
4. To return to the previous page, press  
.
• Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.  
125  
       
• Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.  
Search the Internet  
• Brightness/color: allows you to adjust the brightness of your  
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these  
steps:  
display and the color level.  
• Settings: allows you to modify your web settings. For more  
1. From the Google homepage, tap the Web Search field.  
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen keypad  
• More: displays the following additional options:  
and tap Go  
.
Downloads: displays the download history.  
– or –  
Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a Samsung printer  
using Wi-Fi.  
Tap  
and select a topic to search for.  
Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a  
message.  
3. A list of search results displays.  
4. Tap a link to view the website.  
Adding and Deleting Windows  
Add shortcut to home screen: allows you to set your homepage as a  
shortcut on your display.  
Page info: displays information about the selected page.  
Enter a URL  
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time. To  
add a new window, follow these steps:  
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites  
are optimized for viewing on your phone.  
1. From your browser, press  
New window.  
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these steps:  
A new browser window is opened.  
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.  
2
2. Press  
to at the top of the screen to see a list of all  
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.  
open windows. The number represents the number of new  
windows that have been created.  
The website displays.  
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.  
Connections  
126  
   
4. Tap  
at the top right corner of the web page thumbnail  
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a  
message.  
to delete the window.  
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more  
Using Bookmarks  
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.  
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly  
and easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website  
addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in the  
Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can also view  
your Most visited websites and view your History.  
3. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Bookmark last-viewed page: Creates a new bookmark for the  
last webpage that you viewed.  
• List/Thumbnail view: You can select Thumbnail view (default) to  
see a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or you can  
select List view to see a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL  
listed.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
.
The Bookmarks page is displayed.  
2. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a  
• Create folder: Creates a new bookmark folder.  
bookmark for the following options:  
• Change order: Allows you to move pages around on the  
Bookmarks page. Touch and hold a bookmark icon, then move it to  
the desired location.  
• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.  
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.  
• Move to folder: Allows you to move a page to a folder.  
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the  
• Delete: Allows you to delete one or all of your bookmarks.  
Adding Bookmarks  
1. From any webpage, tap  
viewed page  
Bookmark last-  
• Add shortcut to home screen: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked  
webpage to your phone’s Home screen.  
.
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth,  
Calendar, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Messaging, S Memo, Social  
Hub, or Wi-Fi.  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter or edit the name of the  
bookmark and the URL.  
127  
   
3. Tap OK  
.
a security risk if not properly managed. You can clear these  
cookies from your phone at any time.  
4. Saved to bookmarks will appear at the bottom of the page.  
1. From the Home webpage, press  
all cookie data  
Settings  
Clear  
Editing Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark  
you want to edit.  
.
2. At the Clear prompt, tap OK to delete the cookies or tap  
Cancel to exit.  
2. Tap Edit bookmark  
.
Using your History  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the  
The History list provides you with a list of the most recently  
visited websites. These entries can be used to return to  
previously unmarked web pages.  
bookmark or the URL.  
4. Tap OK  
.
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
History  
.
History  
Deleting Bookmarks  
A list of your most recently visited websites is displayed  
with Name and URL address.  
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark  
you want to delete.  
2. Tap Delete bookmark  
.
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
3. At the Delete confirmation window, tap OK  
.
3. Press  
Clear history to delete the History list.  
Emptying the Cookies  
Using Most Visited  
A cookie is a small file which is placed on your phone by a  
website during navigation. In addition to containing some site-  
specific information, it can also contain some personal  
information (such as a username and password) which can pose  
The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited  
websites that you have bookmarked. These entries can be used  
to return to previously unmarked web pages.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
Most visited  
.
Most visited  
Connections  
128  
         
A list of your most visited webpages is displayed with  
Name and URL address. The webpages that have been  
visited the most will appear at the top.  
• Landscape view only: Displays the browser in only the horizontal  
position.  
• Enable JavaScript: Enables javascript for the current Web page.  
Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove  
the checkmark to disable this function.  
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe  
Flash.  
Browser Settings  
To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these  
steps:  
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page  
and displayed behind the current one. Remove the checkmark to  
disable this function.  
1. Tap Web  
Settings.  
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser.  
2. The following options are available:  
• Default storage: Allows you to set your default storage to Phone or  
Memory Card.  
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or  
Close.  
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to complete  
the process.  
• Open pages in overview: Shows an overview of newly opened  
web pages.  
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to  
complete the process.  
Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.  
• Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup advertisement or  
windows from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to  
disable this function.  
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and  
read cookies from your device.  
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.  
• Load images: Allows web page images to be loaded along with the  
other text components of a loaded website.  
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any  
previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this  
function.  
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of  
the screen as possible.  
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out  
forms. Tap OK to complete the process.  
129  
 
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your  
location.  
(unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring  
knowledge of the Router name and password).  
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap  
OK to complete the process.  
Turning Wi-Fi On  
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning Wi-Fi  
on makes your device able to discover and connect to compatible  
in-range WAPs.  
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for  
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or  
passwords. Tap OK to complete the process.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Wi-Fi settings  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue  
with the current website. Remove the checkmark to disable this  
function.  
2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to activate the feature. A green  
checkmark indicates that Wi-Fi is active. The device will  
scan for available in-range wireless networks and display  
them under Wi-Fi networks on the same screen.  
• Select search engine: allows you to set your default search engine  
to Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.  
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites.  
• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to  
default.  
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Wi-Fi settings  
Settings  
Wireless  
Wi-Fi  
About Wi-Fi  
.
The network names and security settings (Open network or  
Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks are  
displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.  
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to as  
wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local Area  
Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11 wireless  
specification to transmit and receive wireless data. Wi-Fi  
communication requires access to an existing and accessible  
Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open  
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.  
Connections  
130  
     
and network  
Wi-Fi settings.  
Note: When you select an open network, you will be automatically connected  
to the network.  
2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to deactivate the feature. The green  
checkmark will be removed.  
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.  
Manually add your new network connection  
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can  
cause an added drain to your battery and reduce your use times.  
1. Tap Add Wi-Fi network  
.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network  
2. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your Wireless  
Access Point.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Wi-Fi settings  
2. Press Scan  
Wi-Fi Status Indicators  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This  
must match the current security setting on your target  
WAP.  
.
4. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s  
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a  
glance:  
password.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to your  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
target WAP.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a  
communication issue with the target Wireless Access  
Point (WAP).  
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously accessed or  
secured wireless network, you are not prompted to enter the WAP key  
again, unless you reset your device back to its factory default settings.  
Displays when connected to another device using  
Turning Wi-Fi Off  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
131  
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings  
2. On your phone, at the Scan for devices prompt, tap OK. Tap  
the Do not show again checkbox if you want to skip this  
step in the future.  
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set  
up many of your device’s Wi-Fi service, including:  
Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy  
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.  
Viewing your device’s MAC Address  
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP  
3. If you are currently connected to a Wi-Fi network, a prompt  
will display Current network will be disconnected. Tap OK to  
continue.  
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Wi-Fi settings  
2. Press Advanced  
Settings  
Wireless  
4. Tap Wi-Fi Direct. A check mark is displayed indicating that  
.
Wi-Fi Direct is active.  
.
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 on the other device you want to connect  
with.  
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed, tap  
Wi-Fi Direct  
on it.  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
7. Tap Connect  
.
8. The other device will receive a Wi-Fi Direct connection  
prompt and has 2 minutes to tap OK for the connection to  
be made.  
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi Direct.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
and network Wi-Fi Direct settings  
.
Connections  
132  
   
9. Once connected, the other device will show as Connected  
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and shared folder  
in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the  
display at the top of your screen.  
icon will  
information may differ.  
Bluetooth  
About Bluetooth  
10. Tap Device name to change your Device name if desired.  
Sharing Information with Connected Device  
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that  
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth  
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and  
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless  
devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to  
approximately 30 feet.  
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the connected  
device, follow these steps:  
1. View the information that you want to share. For example,  
if you want to share a photo, find the photo in your camera  
viewer or My Files folder, then tap the Share or Share via  
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
option and tap Wi-Fi  
.
To turn Bluetooth on:  
2. Tap the connected device name. For example,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Bluetooth settings  
2. Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark  
Settings  
Wireless  
AndroidP2PXXXX.  
.
3. The other device will receive a prompt to receive the  
information and must tap OK  
.
indicates active). When active,  
Status area.  
appears within the  
4. The file is transferred and the other device will receive a  
screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been received. The  
file can be found in My Files in the ShareViaWifi folder.  
To turn Bluetooth off:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and network Bluetooth settings  
Settings  
Wireless  
.
133  
   
2. Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature. The green  
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
checkmark will be removed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wireless  
and network  
2. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
3. Tap the Device name Visible Visible time-out, and Scan for  
Bluetooth settings.  
Bluetooth Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status  
at a glance:  
,
,
Displays when Bluetooth is turned on.  
devices fields to set the options.  
To change your Bluetooth name:  
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and  
communicating.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Displays when Bluetooth is on but is not connected  
to a Bluetooth device and Bluetooth devices are  
available to connect to.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name  
.
3. Enter a new name.  
4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.  
Displays when Bluetooth is disabled (default status).  
[no icon]  
To make your device visible:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Bluetooth Settings  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible  
.
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the  
characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:  
Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other devices  
for pairing and communication.  
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth  
communication and description  
3. Tap Visible-time-out to set how long your device will  
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth  
devices  
remain invisible.  
To scan for Bluetooth devices:  
Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address  
Connections  
134  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-  
compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and  
functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all  
Bluetooth compatible devices.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan for devices to  
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices  
such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.  
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once a  
pairing has been created, the devices will continue to recognize their  
partnership and exchange information without having to re-enter a  
passcode again.  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices  
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted  
connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.  
When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,  
secure connections while bypassing the discovery and  
authentication process.  
Disconnecting a paired device  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between  
the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the  
pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device,  
there is no need to setup the connection information again.  
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. Tap Scan for devices. Your device will display a list of  
discovered in-range Bluetooth devices.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously paired  
device (from the bottom of the page).  
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.  
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.  
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK  
.
– or –  
5. The external device will then have to also accept the  
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the  
name of the previously paired device, and select  
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.  
Once successfully paired to an external device,  
appears within the Status area.  
Disconnect  
.
135  
2. From the main Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the  
paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off.  
3. Press Import/Export Send namecard via.  
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via Bluetooth.  
A green checkmark will appear next to each entry you  
select.  
Deleting a paired device (unpair)  
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record”  
and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the  
previous pairing information.  
5. Tap Send  
.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
6. Tap Bluetooth  
.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the  
name of the previously paired device (from the bottom of  
the page). This opens the connected device’s menu  
options.  
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.  
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for  
the pairing to be successful.  
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.  
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your  
notifications list.  
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth  
PC Connections  
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you  
may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items  
using a Bluetooth connection.  
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data  
cable using various USB connection modes. When you connect  
the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with Windows  
Media Player, transfer data to and from your device directly, or  
use the Kies air application to access your PC wirelessly.  
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled, and the  
recipient’s device must be visible.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Connections  
136  
       
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device  
Kies Air  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the memory  
card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your  
phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. You  
can view and share call logs, videos, photos, music, bookmarks,  
ringtones, and even send SMS messages from your PC.  
To use the Kies air, follow these steps:  
1. Sign onto the same Wi-Fi network from your phone and  
from your PC.  
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk,  
separate from the internal memory.  
1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files from  
2. On your phone, from the Home screen, tap  
Kies air  
or to the memory card to your PC.  
.
2. From the Home screen, tap  
and network USB utilities  
3. On your phone, tap Connect storage to PC  
Settings  
Wireless  
3. From the Kies air homescreen, tap Start  
A web URL is displayed on your phone screen.  
4. From your PC, enter the URL in your web browser.  
.
.
.
4. Connect a USB cable from your phone to your PC.  
5. On your phone, an Access Request prompt is displayed.  
5. A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected. Tap  
Tap Allow to continue.  
Connect USB storage  
.
6. Tap the Remember for today checkbox if you will be using  
Your phone will appear on your PC as a removable disk.  
Kies air with the same PC later.  
6. Open the folder to view files.  
7. From your PC, a security warning may be displayed asking  
7. Copy files between your PC and your memory card.  
if you want to run this application. Click Run to continue.  
8. To exit, tap Disconnect storage from PC  
.
137  
     
8. On your PC, the Kies air screen is displayed. On your  
phone, the icon appears at the top of your screen.  
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to view and share  
information between your phone and PC.  
10. To exit the Kies air application, tap Stop on your phone,  
then close out the web browser on your PC.  
NFC  
Near Field Communication (NFC) will be available on this phone  
in the future, but is now temporarily disabled.  
Connections  
138  
   
Section 10: Applications  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
available in the Applications Menu, its function, and how to  
navigate through that particular application. If the application is  
already described in another section of this user manual, then a  
cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. see “Connect to a Wi-Fi  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
The AllShare screen is displayed.  
3. To share media, tap Videos Photos, or Music and tap on  
AllShare  
.
,
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-used  
applications to one of the Home screens. For details, see “Customizing  
the media that you would like to share.  
4. At the My device screen, any devices that you can share  
You can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut that will  
display on all Home screens. If you add an application as a primary  
shortcut, the application icon will not be displayed in the Applications  
with are displayed.  
5. Tap on a device to share media.  
6. Tap the Remote device tab at the top of the screen.  
All devices that you can receive media from are displayed.  
AllShare  
AllShare allows your phone to stream photos, music and videos  
from its memory to other Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA)  
certified devices. Your phone can also play digital content  
streamed from other DLNA certified devices.  
7. Tap a device name.  
Media that you can receive from the other device is listed.  
8. Tap an item that you want to stream to your phone.  
Note: To view more information about DLNA certified products visit http://  
.
139  
       
9. Press  
Settings to configure the following settings:  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the  
application from the Android Market.  
• Device name: defaults to your phone. Use the keypad to enter a  
new Media server if desired, and tap Save  
.
AT&T Code Scanner  
AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan two-dimensional (QR and  
datamatrix codes) and one-dimensional (UPC and EAN) barcodes  
found in magazines, stores, and online.  
• Share videos/photos/music: allows you to restrict what is shared  
from your phone. Tap the items you want to share.  
• Upload from other devices: allows you set the phone to select  
how uploads from other devices are started. Tap Always accept  
,
Always ask, or Always reject  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Code Scanner  
• Default memory: allows you to have media saved to your Phone or  
Memory Card. Tap an option.  
.
• Subtitles: allows you to see subtitles on shared media.  
Depending on the setting you changed, a pop-up screen  
may display to restart AllShare. Tap Yes to continue.  
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Code Scanner, you will need to  
download the updated application from the Market. When the Market  
Amazon Kindle  
This application allows you to download books, magazines, and  
newspapers to read on your phone.  
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Amazon Kindle  
.
3. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to continue.  
2. At the Kindle display, tap Get Kindle for Android  
.
4. At the My Profile screen, tap OK to enter profile information  
3. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
or tap Not now to bypass.  
Applications  
140  
           
5. Position your phone approximately 6-8 inches from the  
barcode. Ensure that the barcode is completely within the  
window as shown below. Keep your phone steady for best  
results.  
Note: The first time you use AT&T FamilyMap, you will need to download the  
updated application from the Market. When the Market page displays,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T FamilyMap  
.
2. If you don’t have an account, tap Create New Account and  
follow the on-screen instructions.  
– or –  
If you already have an account, enter your Phone Number  
and Password in the appropriate fields and tap Submit  
.
Note: For more information, visit http://www.att.com/familymap  
.
6. The scanner will automatically scan the barcode. It may  
take several seconds.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
7. After the scan, tap Yes to open the web page to view the  
AT&T Navigator  
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-driven  
applications. These programs not only allow you to achieve turn-  
by-turn navigation, but also access local searches.  
information on the barcode that was scanned.  
AT&T FamilyMap  
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to  
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless phone or  
PC and know that your family's location information is secure  
and private.  
Important!: You must have a data plan to use this feature.  
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.  
141  
         
To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap AT&T Navigator  
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information, refer  
.
2. Read the Terms of Service and tap Accept to acknowledge  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Books  
the terms of use.  
application.  
The first time that you use, AT&T Navigator, the necessary  
files will be downloaded. The AT&T Navigator main screen  
displays.  
Calculator  
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,  
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also  
keeps a history of recent calculations.  
3. Tap a AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to purchase.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
AT&T Ready2Go  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calculator  
.
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric keys.  
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your  
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up  
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the  
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.  
4. Enter the second number.  
5. To view the result, tap equals (=).  
Books  
6. To view calculator history, tap  
located at the top  
With Google Books, you can find more than 3 million free e-books  
and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the eBookstore.  
of the calculator buttons. A history of your past  
calculations is displayed. Tap  
calculator keypad.  
to display the  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Books  
.
7. To clear the calculator history, press  
Clear history  
.
Applications  
142  
         
8. To change the text size, press  
Text size. Tap Small,  
Add Event  
Previous  
Month  
Displays Option Tabs  
Next Month  
Medium, or Large.  
Calendar  
Selected Day  
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,  
week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a  
reminder, if necessary.  
Days with  
Events  
Current Day  
To access the Calendar:  
1. From the Home screen, Calendar  
2. The following options are available:  
Year: displays all 12 months.  
.
Events  
Calendar Options  
• Month: displays the selected month with today’s date highlighted.  
At the bottom of the calendar, scheduled events display in the order  
that they occur. This is the default view.  
From any Calendar view, press  
following options:  
to display the  
• Week: displays the selected week with today’s time and date  
highlighted.  
• Go to: allows you to go to any date on your calendar.  
• Delete: displays the event list, where you can select events to  
delete.  
• 3 days: displays the selected day and the day before and after the  
selected day with any events highlighted.  
• Search: allows you to search all of your events for a keyword.  
• Sync: synchronizes your calendar with accounts you have created.  
• Settings: displays the following calendar settings:  
• day: displays the selected day with any events highlighted.  
• Agenda: displays all events that you have added for all dates in the  
order that they appear.  
Task: displays all events that you have added for all dates in the  
order that they appear.  
Calendars: displays all calendars they you have created.  
Week view: allows you to set the week view to Timeline or Analogue.  
143  
     
First day of week: allows you to set the first day of the week to Sunday  
or Monday. This will affect how the Month view calendar is displayed.  
3. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Go to: allows you to go to any date on your calendar.  
First day of 3-day view: allows you to set the first day of the 3-day  
view to Yesterday or Today.  
• Delete: displays the event list, where you can select events to  
delete.  
Hide declined events: will not display events you have received from  
others if you have declined them.  
• Sync: synchronizes your calendar with accounts you have created.  
• Settings: displays the calendar settings. For more information,  
Lock time zone: allows you to lock the event times and dates to the  
time zone that you select.  
Select time zone: allows you to set the time zone to which event times  
and dates will be locked.  
Camera  
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG  
format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take videos.  
Set alerts and notifications: allows you to turn on audio alerts, set  
Status bar notification, or turn alerts off.  
Vibrate: allows you to set the Event notification tone to vibrate Always,  
Only in Silent mode, or Never.  
Clock  
Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for the Event notification  
tone.  
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the  
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.  
Calendar sync: allows you to sync your calendar with other accounts  
such as email or social accounts.  
Alarm  
Swipe with two fingers: displays information on how to change the  
view by swiping the screen with two fingers.  
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Create alarm. The following options display:  
or ( to set the new time for the event, at which  
Clock  
Alarm  
Agenda  
The Agenda displays all events that you have added for all dates  
in the order that they appear.  
• Time: tap the (  
+)  
-)  
time an alarm will sound.  
1. From the Calendar, tap the Agenda tab.  
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the  
alarm by tapping one of the following options:  
2. Tap any event to display it.  
Applications  
144  
         
Weekly  
time that is set.  
Daily sets the alarm to sound all seven days of the week.  
Every weekday (Mon-Fri) sets the alarm to sound on all five  
weekdays.  
One-time event  
:
sets the alarm to sound once every week on the day and  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,  
:
Z
Z
touch and drag the  
icon in any direction. Snooze  
:
must first be set in the alarm settings. For more  
:
sets the alarm to sound only once.  
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when  
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and Briefing).  
Deleting Alarms  
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:  
• Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
Alarm  
• Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the alarm is  
activated. Select Sounds or Go to My files  
.
Delete.  
• Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30  
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green  
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times).  
checkmark will appear next to each selection.  
• Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the best time  
for sounding the alarm. Place the phone somewhere on your bed  
then the phone's movement sensor (also known as accelerometer)  
is sensitive enough to work from any part of the bed. Set the  
Duration and the Tone.  
3. Tap Delete  
.
World Clock  
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in other  
parts of the world. World Clock displays time in hundreds of  
different cities, within all 24 time zones around the world.  
• Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The name  
will appear on the display when the alarm activates.  
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
clock. The clock for your time zone is displayed.  
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock.  
Clock  
World  
Turning Off an Alarm  
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and drag the  
icon in any direction.  
145  
     
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want to  
add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to enter a  
city to search for.  
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a unit  
of time per lap.  
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.  
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will  
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times  
display.  
recorded.  
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city, then  
Timer  
tap DST settings  
.
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer to  
count down to an event based on a preset time length (hours,  
minutes, and seconds).  
6. Select Automatic  
,
Off, 1 hour, or 2 hours.  
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, the sun symbol on the  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
Timer.  
World Clock listing will appear orange.  
2. The min field is highlighted and set to 1 minute. Use the  
Deleting a World Clock Entry  
keypad to set the number of minutes you want.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
clock Delete  
2. Tap the city clocks you wish to delete.  
3. Tap Delete  
Stopwatch  
Clock  
World  
3. Tap the hr field to set hours if desired. As you tap different  
.
fields, they will become highlighted.  
4. Tap the sec field to set seconds.  
.
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the  
timer.  
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Clock  
Stopwatch  
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to set  
the timer back to the original setting.  
.
Applications  
146  
     
Desk clock  
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and you  
want your phone to display the time, day, date, location, and  
weather conditions when it is docked.  
Crayon Physics  
Crayon Physics Deluxe is a game the uses two-dimensional  
physics, including gravity, mass, kinetic energy and transfer of  
momentum. The objective of the game is to guide a ball from a  
starting point so that it touches all of the stars placed on each  
level.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
clock  
The default Desk clock is displayed.  
Clock  
Desk  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Crayon physics  
.
2. To make changes, tap Settings  
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to play the game.  
3. The following options are displayed:  
• Time/Calendar display: when this is checked, the time, day, and  
date is displayed. Tap to uncheck.  
Downloads  
The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your  
downloads from the Market and the Browser.  
• AccuWeather: when this is checked, the location, temperature,  
and weather condition is displayed. Tap to uncheck.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Downloads  
.
• Reset to default: sets your Desk clock settings to the factory  
default.  
All of your downloads are listed.  
• Dock: tap Audio output mode to create a checkmark if you want to  
use the external dock speakers when the phone is docked.  
2. Tap the Internet downloads tab to see all of the downloads  
you have made from the Browser.  
Contacts  
3. Tap the Other downloads tab to see all other downloads.  
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name and  
number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can be  
sorted by name, entry, or group.  
4. Tap  
Sort by size to see your downloads sorted in  
size order.  
147  
         
5. Tap  
time order.  
Facebook  
You can use the Facebook app to go directly to your Facebook  
account rather than accessing it from the Browser.  
Sort by time to see your downloads sorted in  
4. Tap the left or right arrow keys to scroll through  
information on the featured applications.  
5. Scroll down and tap on an application that you would like  
to download.  
6. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Facebook  
.
7. Tap the Go To Android Market bar at the bottom of the  
2. If you already have a facebook account, tap on the Email  
display to go to the Market.  
and Password fields and enter your information using the  
Gallery  
on-screen keyboard, then tap Login  
.
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For  
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and share  
– or –  
If you don’t have a Facebook account, tap Sign up and  
follow the on-screen instructions.  
Featured Apps  
The Featured Apps application allows you to see the latest  
featured applications available on the Android Market.  
Gmail  
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured when  
you first set up your phone. Depending on your synchronization  
settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize with your Gmail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Featured Apps  
.
2. Sign in to your Google account.  
3. The first time you use the application, read the End-User  
License Agreement and tap Yes, I agree to continue.  
Applications  
148  
             
4. Tap Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi on.  
Google Search  
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet  
search engine powered by Google™. For more information, refer  
5. Log on to your Google account. For more information, refer  
6. Press  
Your Latitude friends list is displayed.  
7. Press Map view  
Latitude  
.
Kies air  
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your  
phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. You  
can view call logs, videos, photos, bookmarks, IMs, and even  
send SMS messages from your home computer. For more  
.
Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 30  
meters.  
Latitude  
Sharing your Location with Friends  
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your  
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your  
location.  
1. From the Latitude map screen, tap  
Latitude friends. At first, only your name is displayed.  
2. Press Add friends  
3. Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address  
4. Tap a contact or enter an email address and tap Add  
friends  
5. At the Send sharing requests prompt, tap Yes  
to display your  
.
You must first set up your phone to use wireless networks to help  
pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when Wi-Fi is  
enabled.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Location and security  
Settings  
.
.
.
2. Tap Use wireless networks. A green checkmark indicates  
Your friend will receive an email or text message with your  
location marked on a map. They will also receive  
the feature is enabled.  
3. Press  
149  
Wireless and network  
Wi-Fi settings.  
instructions on how to view your location from the web or  
       
Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status  
messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages and  
emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’ locations.  
use Latitude on their phone provided it is available. Once  
they acknowledge your request, their location will display  
on your phone. They can share their location from their  
computer or phone. For more information, go to http://  
Location history: allows you to store your location history using  
background history reporting.  
My Places: allows you to see locations you have marked as a  
favorite such as restaurants, museums, parks, and so forth. Press  
and hold on a location and when the screen displays with the  
address, tap the star in the upper-right corner. It will be listed in your  
Starred Places.  
www.google.com/latitude  
.
6. To view the map, press  
Map view.  
Latitude Options  
From the map display, press  
options:  
to display the following  
• Settings: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can  
receive help on Google Maps.  
Cache Settings: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when  
not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles.  
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.  
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a  
starting point.  
Location reporting: allows you to manage the settings for your  
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude location  
sharing, and Check-ins.  
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from the  
map.  
Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren’t ready  
for primetime. They may change, break or disappear at any time. Click  
on a Lab to enable or disable it.  
• More: allows you to select the following additional options:  
Map: allows you to see the map view.  
Places: allows you to that use Google Maps and your location to help  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy  
Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from  
the pop-up menu.  
you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, etc.  
Navigation: allows you to use the Navigation application which is  
an internet-connected GPS navigation system with voice guidance.  
You can type or speak your destination.  
About: displays general information about Google maps such as  
Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free  
memory, etc.  
Applications  
150  
• Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can  
receive help on Google Maps.  
2. Tap the Use GPS satellites field. A green checkmark will  
display next to the field.  
Live TV  
Note: Selecting Use GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at  
the street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky and  
uses more battery power.  
Live TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch your  
favorite TV shows using your handset. For more information,  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
Maps  
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and  
satellite maps and local business information, including  
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You can  
also post public messages about a location and track your  
friends.  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
Important!: Before using Google Maps you must have an active data  
connection. The Maps application does not cover every country  
or city.  
Using Maps  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Maps  
.
A map will display with your location in the very center.  
Enabling a Location Source  
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for  
places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable  
the location source you must enable the wireless network, or  
enable the GPS satellites.  
2. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.  
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a  
starting point.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Location and security  
Settings  
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from the  
map.  
.
151  
         
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy  
Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from  
the pop-up menu.  
• More: allows you to select the following additional options:  
Map: allows you to see the map view.  
Places: allows you to that use Google Maps and your location to help  
About: displays general information about Google maps such as  
Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free  
memory, etc.  
you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, etc.  
Navigation: allows you to use the Navigation application which is  
an internet-connected GPS navigation system with voice guidance.  
You can type or speak your destination.  
Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can  
receive help on Google Maps.  
Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status  
messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages and  
emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’ locations.  
Market  
Android Market provides access to downloadable applications  
and games to install on your phone. Android Market also allows  
you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or  
flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone.  
Location history: allows you to store your location history using  
background history reporting.  
My Places: allows you to see locations you have marked as a  
favorite such as restaurants, museums, parks, and so forth. Press  
and hold on a location and when the screen displays with the  
address, tap the star in the upper-right corner. It will be listed in your  
Starred Places.  
Before using the Android Market you must have a Google  
• Settings: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can  
receive help on Google Maps.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Market  
.
Cache Settings: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when  
not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles.  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Market  
icon. If you  
delete it, or if you want to access Messaging from another Home  
screen, you must tap Applications  
Market  
.
Location reporting: allows you to manage the settings for your  
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude location  
sharing, and Check-ins.  
2. Sign in to your Google account.  
Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren’t ready  
for primetime. They may change, break or disappear at any time. Click  
on a Lab to enable or disable it.  
Applications  
152  
     
3. The first time you sign in, the Android Market Terms of  
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or Decline  
to exit.  
Messaging  
You can send and receive messages and other features  
associated with messaging such as Email, Gmail, and Google  
4. Tap one of the category icons to download or purchase  
applications, games, books, or movies. You can also  
download updates to existing applications.  
– or –  
Mini Diary  
The Mini Diary allows you to keep a diary of your daily activities  
and also attach pictures. You can publish your diary entries to  
Facebook and MySpace.  
Tap  
to search for an application.  
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mini Diary  
.
Note: To use any downloaded market application that requires a USB  
connection between your phone and your PC, you should first set the  
USB utilities setting to Connect storage to PC. For more information,  
2. Tap Create diary to start a new diary entry.  
3. Tap the Tap to add photo field to add a photo.  
4. To take a new picture, tap Camera. To add a photo from  
Media Hub  
your Gallery, tap Gallery. To add an image from S Memo,  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and  
TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite content and  
watch from the convenience of anywhere. For more information,  
tap S Memo  
5. Tap the Tap to add text field to add text to your diary then  
tap Done  
6. Tap the Add location field to add your location then tap  
Done  
7. Tap Save  
.
.
Messages  
.
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail messages  
together into a single conversation thread and is accessible by  
.
153  
         
Publish: allows you to publish your diary to Facebook.  
8. The dairy entry will be added to your Mini Diary with  
Send via: allows you to send your Diary entry by Email or Messaging.  
today’s date.  
11. At the Mini Diary screen, press  
to display the  
9. While in a diary entry that has been previously saved, and  
following options:  
does not have a photo, press  
options:  
to display the following  
• Search: allows you to search your diaries for a particular word or  
words.  
• Create: allows you to create a new diary entry.  
• Delete: allows you to delete a diary entry.  
• List by: allows you to sort by Date or Location.  
• Delete All: allows you to delete all diary entries.  
• Go to: allows you to go to a specific day on the calendar.  
• Publish: allows you to publish your diary to Facebook.  
• Settings: allows you to select Auto update which will update your  
Selected city based on GPS.  
• Send via: allows you to send your Diary entry by Email or  
Movies  
Messaging.  
The Movies application allows you to rent movies to watch on  
10. While in a diary entry that has been previously saved, and  
does have a photo, press  
options:  
to display the following  
Music  
With the Music application, while online, you can play music that  
you have added to your music file as well as any music you  
copied from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you  
• Create: allows you to create a new diary entry.  
• Delete: allows you to delete a diary entry.  
• Go to: allows you to go to a specific day on the calendar.  
• Change photo: allows you to change your photo if you have already  
added one. This option only displays if a photo has been added.  
Music Player  
Music Player allows you to play music files that you have stored  
on your phone and memory card. You can also create playlists.  
• Delete photo: allows you to delete your photo. This option only  
displays if a photo has been added.  
• More: select one of the following options:  
Applications  
154  
       
My Files  
Note: The first time you use myAT&T, you will need to download the updated  
application from the Market. When the Market page displays, tap  
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,  
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one  
convenient location.  
Initial Setup  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My Files  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
myAT&T  
.
2. The following folders display:  
2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an  
• DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken by  
the device. Tap DCIM Camera to view the picture or video files.  
3. After signing into your Google Account, the Android Market  
• Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android  
applications.  
displays the myAT&T application. Tap the application.  
4. Tap Update  
.
• external_sd: this folder displays all of the files that you have on  
your memory card.  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.  
Using myAT&T  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your phone is  
myAT&T  
.
configured.  
The myAT&T page is displayed.  
myAT&T  
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to continue.  
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own AT&T  
account. You can review and pay your bill, check minutes and  
data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change your rate plan.  
3. Enter your Wireless # and Password using the on-screen  
keypad, then tap Login  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
155  
       
Type Destination: allows you to use the keypad to enter your  
Navigation  
destination.  
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system with  
voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.  
• Contacts: displays a list of all of your contacts that have addresses  
listed.  
• Starred Places: allows you to keep a list of favorite destinations,  
locations, restaurants, etc. Just tap a starred item to get directions.  
Note: For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-to-speech support  
from the Android Market.  
• Recent Destinations: allows you to access information on previous  
destinations you have used. This option only appears after you have  
entered one or more destinations.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
The map displays with your location in the center.  
Navigation Options  
1. While navigating, press  
Menu for the following  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
options:  
• Search: Find a location.  
Launching Navigation  
• Route Info: View information about the current route.  
• Layers: Choose map layers to display.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation  
.
2. Read the Navigation information page and tap Accept to  
• Mute/Unmute: Mute to silence voice-guided prompts.  
• Exit Navigation: Close Navigation and discard route information.  
• More: The following options are available:  
continue or Don’t Accept to exit.  
The Choose Destination screen displays.  
Directions List: View directions in a step-by-step list.  
Set Destination: Choose or enter a destination.  
Help: Learn about Google maps.  
3. Select one of the following options:  
• Speak Destination: allows you to speak your destination.  
Applications  
156  
     
Terms, Privacy & Notices: View information about Google Maps,  
including the Service Agreement and Privacy Policy, and give Feedback.  
Note: You will need to be signed on to your Google account before  
2. If Driving, press  
Route options to set whether directions should Avoid  
highways and Avoid tolls  
Menu  
Route Info, then touch  
5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you will  
.
receive voice-guided navigation directions.  
Obtaining Driving Directions  
News & Weather  
The News & Weather application allows you to view the news  
and weather in your area.  
Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-time  
driving directions to selected locations or establishments based  
on your current location.  
Now is the time for all good  
men to come to the aid of their  
country The quick brown fox  
.
jumps over the lazy dog.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
News & Weather  
.
Using a Physical Address  
The Weather screen is displayed with current temperature,  
conditions, Humidity, and Wind speed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation  
.
2. Tap either Speak Destination or Type Destination  
.
2. Tap the temperature to display a graph mapping the days  
3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and State  
using the keypad. As you type, possible addresses will be  
displayed. Tap on one when you see the address you want.  
temperature and humidity.  
3. While on the Weather screen, press  
to display the  
following options:  
The route will be displayed.  
• Refresh: allows you to refresh the screen. Your location and the  
4. The Voice guidance screen is displayed. For voice-guided  
navigation you need to install text-to-speech support from  
the Android Market. Tap Install to install the application or  
tap Skip to exit.  
weather is updated if there have been any changes.  
• Settings: allows you to set weather, news, and refresh settings.  
Weather settings: allows you to choose location(s) and set the metric  
for temperature displays.  
157  
     
News settings: allows you to choose topics, configure settings for  
fetching articles and images, and view the terms of service for news  
service.  
4. The business details such as address, phone, website, and  
location are displayed. You can also see reviews from  
around the web and from Google users.  
Refresh settings: allows you to choose options for updating content.  
Application version: displays the application version number.  
Polaris Office  
®
4. To view the news, sweep the screen to the left to display  
Top Stories U.S. Sports, and Entertainment  
Places  
Places is an application that uses Google Maps and your location  
to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars, Attractions, and other  
businesses. You can also add your own locations.  
Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office  
,
,
.
compatible office suite. This application provides a central place  
for managing your documents online or offline.  
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document  
Format) files.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Polaris Office.  
2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch Register  
The Places application allows you to find the best sources for  
business information across the web, including business listing  
details, reviews, photos, nearby public transit, and other related  
information. Business owners can provide additional details, like  
photos, hours of operation, and coupons.  
to complete the process.  
– or –  
Touch Later to ignore this registration.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Places  
.
The main Polaris Office screen displays. My files displays a  
list of all the files on your phone.  
2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a  
particular business.  
3. Touch  
text string.  
Search to search for document files by using a  
All of the business categories that are close to you will be  
displayed.  
4. Several options are listed under Category. Touch one of the  
following:  
3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.  
Applications  
158  
           
About: Displays the Polaris Office version and build numbers.  
• My Files: Where you keep documents on this device. You can  
manage documents or send them to others, and upload the  
Qik Lite  
Allows you to record and share live video from your device with  
your friends, family and your favorite social networks. For more  
• Recent documents: Displays documents that you have recently  
created or modified.  
S Memo  
• Web files: Provides your online storage information at Box.net. You  
can also share your documents to others without using email  
attachments.  
The S Memo application allows you to create memos using the  
keypad, the S Pen tool, or both. You can add images, voice  
recordings, and text all in one place.  
5. Press  
to access these additional options:  
• Manage files: allows you to manage your files. You can Move,  
Creating a New Memo  
1. From the main Home screen, tap S Memo  
Copy, and Delete.  
.
• Sort by: Allows you to sort by File name, Date, Size, or Type.  
The S Memo screen is displayed.  
• Settings: Displays the following options:  
Create back-up file: Touch the check box to enable creating a back-  
up file when you save documents.  
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to  
enter edit mode.  
– or –  
Display file extensions: Touch the check box to enable the display of  
file extensions.  
Pivot lock: allows you to lock the screen so that it won’t move between  
landscape and portrait mode when you rotate your phone.  
Tap  
to start a new memo in text mode with the  
to start a new memo in  
keypad displayed or tap  
Custom zoom: allows you to enter a customized zoom level  
between 50 and 200 that you can access from the zoom option.  
drawing mode using the S Pen. You can change back and  
forth in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.  
Accounts: Touch to manage the accounts you have created.  
Live update: Touch to make sure you have the latest version of Polaris  
Office.  
159  
     
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the S Memo  
delete it, or if you want to access S Memo from another Home screen,  
you must tap Applications S Memo  
icon. If you  
Redo the last action that was undone.  
Displays the full screen.  
.
Toolbar  
Secondary Toolbar  
Add pictures, clipart, maps, etc.  
Make a voice recording to add to the memo.  
Mark the memo as a favorite.  
Add Title  
Show/Hide  
Secondary Toolbar  
Writing area  
Hide the secondary toolbar.  
Show the secondary toolbar.  
Add Page  
Add an additional page to the memo.  
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described in  
the following table:  
3. Press  
to access the following options:  
Saves the memo.  
Note: Depending on whether you have saved the memo, are in keypad mode,  
or in S Pen mode, the options will appear differently. The following is a  
list of the options you may see.  
Displays the keypad to you can add text.  
Allows you to add free-format drawing using the S Pen.  
Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.  
Undo the last action.  
• Set as: allows you to set a memo as a contact icon, Home screen  
wallpaper, Lock screen wallpaper, or a widget.  
• Handwriting-to-text: allows you to transcribe handwriting into text.  
Applications  
160  
• Share via: allows you to share your memo using AllShare, Social  
Hub, Photo editor, Messaging, Picassa, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Facebook,  
Gmail, or Email.  
take notes during a phone call or write down ideas while surfing  
the web.  
To launch S Memo Lite, follow these steps:  
1. From any screen, hold the S Pen button and double-tap the  
screen.  
Note: You can share an S Memo using Gmail but any voice recording that has  
been attached to the S Memo will not be sent with the rest of the  
memo.  
• Change background: allows you to set the background for your  
memo. Swipe the screen to the left or right to select a background  
and then tap Set skin  
.
• Add tag: allows you to set tags to add in searches.  
• More: the following additional options are available:  
Export: allows you to save the memo to your Gallery or as a PDF.  
Lock: allows you to lock an email by using a PIN number.  
Link to Calendar: allows you to link the memo to your calendar.  
Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a Samsung printer  
using Wi-Fi.  
Press S Pen button  
2. Enter your memo using the keypad or the S Pen.  
Save as: allows you to save the memo with a different name.  
4. When you are finished creating your memo, tap Save on  
Icons and options are the same as S Memo. For more  
the top menu bar.  
S Memo Lite  
3. Tap Save when you are finished. Memos are saved in the  
S Memo Lite is an application that you can launch from any  
screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas. It’s a great way to  
S Memo folder.  
From the main Home screen, tap  
. to see all of your memos.  
161  
2. To setup your Social Hub account, tap Set up now  
.
Samsung Apps  
Samsung Apps allows you to easily download an abundance of  
applications to your phone. Featuring a wealth of games, news,  
reference, social networking, navigation, and more applications,  
Samsung Apps makes your Smartphone smarter.  
3. Tap on the Social Hub account type that you would like to  
setup.  
4. Read the SNS disclaimer, tap the I accept all the terms  
above checkbox, then tap Agree to continue.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Samsung Apps.  
Settings  
Samsung Apps  
.
5. Tap Next  
.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions for adding an account.  
7. From the Social Hub main screen, tap the Feeds or  
Messages tabs to see information pertaining to your  
account.  
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for your  
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory,  
and any extra settings associated with your phone. For more  
8. To add another account, press  
Accounts  
Add  
Social Hub  
account.  
With Social Hub, you can now easily and intuitively satisfy all of  
your relevant communication needs from one integrated user  
experience. E-mails, instant messaging, social network contents,  
and calendar contents from all major service providers are  
available.  
Talk  
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This  
allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail  
To access Social Hub, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Social Hub  
.
The Social Hub Welcome page describes all of the  
available features.  
Applications  
162  
             
Task Manager  
Voice Recorder  
The Task Manager application provides information about the  
processes and programs running on your phone, as well as the  
memory status. It can also be used to terminate processes and  
applications.  
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one  
minute long and then immediately share it using AllShare,  
Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time will vary  
based on the available memory within the phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Recorder  
.
To access the Task Manager, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Task Manager  
.
Record  
2. To start recording, tap  
and speak into the  
microphone.  
2. The Task Manager options are located at the top of the  
screen. The following options are available:  
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop  
Stop  
Pause  
• Active applications: displays all of the applications that are  
presently running on your phone. Tap Exit to end an application, or  
tap Exit all to end all running applications.  
to stop and save the recording or Pause  
to  
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap  
Record  
to resume recording. Once the audio recording  
• Downloaded: displays the size of your downloaded application  
programs.  
has stopped, the message is automatically saved. Tap  
Cancel  
to cancel the recording without saving.  
• RAM: displays the Random Access Memory (RAM) and allows you  
to clear different levels of RAM.  
4. A list of all your voice recordings is displayed under the  
• Storage: displays a summary of your device’s storage (used and  
available).  
control buttons. Tap a voice recording to play it.  
5. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Help: displays information on how to extend battery life.  
• Share: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth, Email,  
Videos  
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi.  
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap the  
recordings to delete and tap Done  
.
163  
           
• Rename: allows you to rename your recordings.  
4. Results will display on the screen. Tap a link to view the  
• Settings: the following settings are available:  
information.  
– or –  
Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings will be saved.  
Select between Phone or memory card.  
The No matches found screen will display if Voice Search  
Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your  
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your recordings  
would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003, etc.  
was not able to find a match. Tap Try again or Cancel  
.
Voice Talk  
Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to High or  
Normal.  
With the Voice Talk application you can use your voice to perform  
operations that you would normally have to do by hand such as  
dialing a phone number, texting a message, playing music, etc.  
Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for MMS by  
selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can be sent in a  
message.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Talk  
.
Voice Search  
The Voice Search feature is a voice-activated application that  
allows you to tell the phone what to search for and then the  
phone activates a Google search based on what you said.  
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to  
continue.  
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Search  
.
continue.  
– or –  
4. Read the information on the About Voice talk screen, then  
tap Next  
5. Read the information on the Wake up Voice talk screen,  
then tap Next  
6. Read the information on the Say the command screen, then  
tap Next  
From the main Home screen, tap  
the Google Search bar.  
on the right side of  
.
.
2. The Speak now screen will display. Speak clearly into the  
microphone.  
.
3. The Working screen will display as it searches for you.  
Applications  
164  
       
7. Read the information on the What can I say? screen, then  
tap Done  
4. If you prefer high quality video, as the video starts to play,  
tap HQ  
5. Tap  
.
.
8. At the Voice talk screen, tap on an icon for assistance in  
using Voice command or tap Tap & Speak to speak what  
you would like to do.  
to go to your camcorder so you can take your  
own videos.  
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view content.  
However, if you wish to sign in to access additional options, access the  
page via the Web browser and tap Sign in at the top right corner, enter  
9. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
YouTube  
your YouTube or Google username and password, and tap Sign in  
.
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can upload  
and share videos. The site is used to display a wide variety of  
user-generated video content, including movie clips, TV clips,  
and music videos, as well as video content such as video  
blogging, informational shorts and other original videos.  
YPmobile  
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready  
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your favorite  
searches. This application allows you to tap into local  
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your search  
in real-time.  
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended that you  
upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional data charges.  
Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the updated  
application from the Market. When the Market page displays, tap  
Update or Install then follow the on-screen instructions. For more  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YouTube  
.
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,  
scroll down to browse through the main page thumbnails,  
or scroll to the bottom to explore additional options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YPmobile  
.
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap  
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or tap  
Accept to continue.  
the title link.  
165  
         
3. Read the introduction information and tap Continue  
.
4. Your location is found using GPS. Tap OK to allow YP to use  
your current location.  
5. Enter a subject or business name, city, and state in the  
search field and tap Search  
.
– or –  
Tap  
to use the voice search feature.  
Results are displayed in list format.  
6. Tap the globe symbol (  
present location.  
Filter  
) to display a map of your  
7. Tap  
to narrow down your search results.  
8. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it  
outwards to zoom in.  
9. Tap a location to see the address, phone number, reviews,  
and get directions. You can also Share, Add to Favorites,  
and Add to Contacts.  
10. Tap  
to display additional options.  
Applications  
166  
Section 11: Health and Safety Information  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using  
your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used  
in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before  
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially  
reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high  
levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),  
exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects  
causes no known adverse health effects.  
using your mobile device  
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the  
following information:  
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be  
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic  
energy.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in  
X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization  
is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal  
locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage  
biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause  
cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific  
evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over  
the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies  
looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy  
emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported  
biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have  
failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have  
failed to show an association between exposure to radio  
frequency from a cell phone and health problems.  
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore,  
RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of  
non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation  
(heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with  
relatively low frequencies.  
167  
         
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood  
flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain  
cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain  
cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use  
of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every  
day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in  
brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and  
errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data.  
Additional information about Interphone can be found at  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between  
RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,  
attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have  
shown a connection have failed.  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not  
answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research  
is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to  
monitor developments in this field.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and  
adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has  
supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge.  
Some of these studies are described below.  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring  
of a large group of people to determine if there are any health  
issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy  
from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to determine  
whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A  
report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology  
(June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000  
people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar  
number of healthy controls.  
approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to  
30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be  
.
Health and Safety Information  
168  
RiskofBrainCancerfromExposuretoRadioFrequencyFields  
in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for  
the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the  
user; and  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship  
between exposure to radio frequency energy from  
communication technologies including cell phones and brain  
cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center  
study involving 14 European and non-European countries.  
Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies  
such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation  
Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards  
continue to adequately protect the public.  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program  
of the National Cancer Institute  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for  
brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use  
has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987  
and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did  
not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy  
(RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that  
there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned  
about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple  
steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
http://seer.cancer.gov/  
.
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your  
head and the cell phone.  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory  
actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a  
number of steps, including the following:  
169  
 
Hands-Free Kits  
advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields”  
may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may  
be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an  
increase in RF absorption.  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and  
various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and  
holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy  
absorption from cell phones.  
Children and Cell Phones  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone  
is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved  
body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are  
required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when  
used against the head and against the body.  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of  
cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers.  
The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to  
children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the  
head and the cell phone.  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions  
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free  
kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience  
and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you  
want to use your phone while driving.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at  
all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom  
made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report,  
a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that  
using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their  
recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly  
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any  
health hazard exists.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from  
RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions  
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories  
which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce  
risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF  
absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing  
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies  
have shown that these products generally do not work as  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various  
sources can be obtained from the following organizations  
(updated 10/1/2010):  
Health and Safety Information  
170  
 
FCC RF Safety Program:  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification  
Information  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is  
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for  
Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
These FCC exposure limits are derived from the  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and  
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific  
and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and  
academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature  
related to the biological effects of RF energy.  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones  
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific  
Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of  
absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of  
watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to  
comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
US Food and Drug Administration:  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of  
safety to give additional protection to the public and to account  
for any variations in measurements.  
171  
   
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest  
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the  
SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual  
SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the  
maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to  
operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power  
required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a  
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.  
for this model phone as reported in the FCC equipment  
authorization grant are:  
GSM/GPRS/EDGE/ WCDMA/LTE  
The highest reported SAR values are:  
Head: 0.27 W/Kg  
Body: 1.04 W/Kg  
Product Specific (Hotspot): 1.04 W/Kg  
Simultaneous Transmission: 1.43 W/Kg  
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it  
must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed  
the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model  
phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear  
and worn on the body) as required by the FCC.  
WLAN  
The highest reported SAR values are:  
Head: 0.14 W/Kg  
Body: 0.39 W/Kg  
Product Specific (Hotspot): < 0.1 W/Kg  
Simultaneous Transmission: 1.43 W/Kg  
For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that  
contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a  
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.  
SAR information on this and other model phones can be viewed  
online at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone  
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case  
of the phone.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF  
exposure guidelines.  
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile  
phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance  
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values  
Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to  
find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a  
particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it  
should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular  
Health and Safety Information  
172  
phone. Additional product specific SAR information can also be  
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
FCC Part 15 Information to User:  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that  
changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung  
could void your authority to operate the device.  
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for  
help.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not  
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
On the Road - Off the Phone  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of  
his or her vehicle.  
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be  
performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to  
passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has  
assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the  
secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.  
Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which  
may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so  
absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act  
of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting  
responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to  
understand and address distractions.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with  
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning  
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct  
the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and  
their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them.  
173  
       
The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain  
areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in  
certain areas.  
automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result  
in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.  
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call  
go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember,  
driving comes first, not the call!  
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web  
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these  
tips:  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games  
while operating a vehicle.  
Use a hands-free device;  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
Secure your phone within easy reach;  
Place calls when you are not moving;  
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Battery Use and Safety  
Important!: Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage  
.
Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries  
and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries.  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving  
and will suspend the call if necessary;  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt  
to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of  
pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-  
circuit, resulting in overheating.  
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an  
automobile:  
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.  
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even  
when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally,  
the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the  
phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the  
automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an  
Health and Safety Information  
174  
   
provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working  
properly.  
Important!: Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge your battery  
only with Samsung-approved chargers which are specifically  
designed for your phone.  
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the  
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with  
an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer,  
iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high  
temperatures.  
Warning!: Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may present a  
risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. Samsung's  
warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused by non-  
Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.  
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or  
the battery may explode when overheated.  
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some  
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable  
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even  
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase  
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If  
unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,  
contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking  
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe  
disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service  
center.  
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery,  
especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the  
phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take  
it to a service center for inspection.  
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging  
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible  
risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries,  
damages to your phone, or other serious hazard  
.
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental  
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry,  
clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals  
of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry  
a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may  
damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.  
175  
   
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only  
important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must  
be recycled or disposed of properly.  
Mail It In  
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung  
customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to  
yle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to print out a  
free pre-paid postage label and then send your old mobile  
device or battery to the address listed, via U.S. Mail, for  
recycling.  
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and  
accessories may not be available in your area.  
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile  
device by working with respected take-back companies in every  
state in the country.  
Drop It Off  
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:  
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and  
batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung  
Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be  
Or call, (877) 278-0799.  
.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices  
and batteries  
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at  
these locations for no fee.  
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with  
local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in  
household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect  
the environment - recycle!  
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or  
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where  
mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information  
regarding specific locations may be found at:  
Warning!: Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.  
.
Health and Safety Information  
176  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
Display / Touch-Screen  
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety  
requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions  
per UL guidelines:  
Please note the following information when using your mobile  
device:  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or  
if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is  
broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN  
MOBILE DEVICE  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please  
note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch  
from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using  
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the  
touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface  
and void the warranty. For more information, refer to  
“Standard Limited Warranty” on page 27.  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF  
THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER  
OUTLET.  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY  
ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR  
MOUNT POSITION.  
177  
       
applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties  
providing services.  
GPS & AGPS  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning  
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses  
satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to  
changes implemented in accordance with the Department of  
Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).  
Changes may affect the performance of location-based  
technology on your mobile device.  
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls  
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may  
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the  
emergency responders your approximate location.  
AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area. Therefore:  
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your  
ability; and  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global  
Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the  
cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your  
wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data  
charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with  
your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for  
details.  
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder  
instructs you.  
Navigation  
Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain  
inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do  
change over time. In some areas, complete information may not  
be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact  
Your Location  
Location-based information includes information that can be  
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device.  
Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network  
transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use  
applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving  
directions), such applications transmit location-based  
safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs  
.
information. The location-based information may be shared with  
third-parties, including your wireless service provider,  
Health and Safety Information  
178  
   
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may  
first need to deactivate those features before you can make an  
emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular  
service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to  
give all the necessary information as accurately as possible.  
Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of  
communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call  
until given permission to do so.  
Emergency Calls  
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates  
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as  
user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection  
in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should  
never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential  
communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before  
traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate  
method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember,  
to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched  
on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.  
Care and Maintenance  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions  
below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you  
to enjoy this product for many years:  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile  
device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile  
device features are in use. Check with local service providers.  
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids  
contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the  
mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the  
use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage  
the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not  
use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an  
electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
. The dialer is displayed.  
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location (for  
example, 911 or other official emergency number).  
Emergency numbers vary by location.  
4. Tap the  
key.  
179  
       
Extreme heat or cold  
Responsible Listening  
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.  
Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
Microwaves  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is  
played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to  
loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of  
preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that  
using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and  
cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead  
to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use  
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or  
other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also  
been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the  
ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing  
problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a  
portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the  
sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As  
a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for  
everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and  
equipment.  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Dust and dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth  
slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.  
Shock or vibration  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Paint  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s  
moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper  
operation.  
You should follow some common sense recommendations when  
using any portable audio device:  
Health and Safety Information  
180  
   
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an  
audio source.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at  
which you can hear adequately.  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not  
realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the  
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear  
what you are listening to.  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use  
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental  
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling  
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than  
when using earbuds.  
National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time  
is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such  
as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary  
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.  
Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience  
any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio  
device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
181  
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)  
395 E Street, S.W.  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment  
may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless  
mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.  
Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Implantable Medical Devices  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable  
medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter  
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.  
Persons who have such devices:  
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from  
their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Operating Environment  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area,  
and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger.  
When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another  
device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do  
not connect incompatible products.  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason  
to suspect that interference is taking place;  
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your  
implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using  
your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device,  
consult your health care provider.  
Health and Safety Information  
182  
   
Potentially Explosive Environments  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
faqs.html#  
.
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially  
explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks  
in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily  
injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile  
device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are  
reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio  
equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),  
chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress.  
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not  
always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,  
chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air  
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal  
powders, and any other area where you would normally be  
advised to turn off your vehicle engine.  
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to  
assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile  
device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in  
these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care  
facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to  
external RF energy.  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the  
manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before  
using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also  
consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added  
to your vehicle.  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309 modified the  
exception of wireless mobile devices under the Hearing Aid  
Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require digital wireless  
mobile devices be compatible with hearing aids.  
Posted Facilities  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices  
require you to do so.  
183  
   
The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to  
telecommunications services for persons with hearing  
disabilities. While some wireless mobile devices are used near  
some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants),  
users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some  
hearing devices are more immune than others to this  
interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of  
interference they generate.  
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements  
and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices  
than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher  
of the two ratings.  
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device  
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find  
this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is  
relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and  
wireless mobile device rating values are then added together.  
A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6  
is considered for best use.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system  
for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find  
mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing  
devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices  
that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on  
the box.  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on  
the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device  
happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to  
use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile  
device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for  
your personal needs.  
T3  
+
T2  
=
5
M3  
+
M2  
=
5
If a hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless mobile  
device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two values  
equal M5. This is synonymous for T ratings. This should provide  
the hearing aid user with “normal usage” while using their  
hearing aid with the particular wireless mobile device.  
M-Ratings: Mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to  
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is  
the better/higher of the two ratings.  
Health and Safety Information  
184  
“Normal usage” in this context is defined as a signal quality that  
is acceptable for normal operation. The M mark is intended to be  
synonymous with the U mark. The T mark is intended to be  
synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T marks are  
recommended by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industries  
Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section  
20.19 of the FCC Rules.  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with  
it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the  
mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device  
bill.  
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of  
the reach of small children.  
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
FCC Notice  
HAC/Wi-Fi for Newer Technologies  
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids  
for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there  
may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone  
that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is  
important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly  
and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear  
implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult  
your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for  
information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions  
about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider  
or phone retailer.  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in  
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you  
to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be  
eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection  
Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the  
National Fire Protection Association.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly  
approved in this document could void your warranty for this  
equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.  
Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of  
any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the  
185  
       
mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a  
defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite  
sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.  
Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or  
denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.  
Other Important Safety Information  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the  
mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be  
dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your  
vehicle are securely mounted.  
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials  
in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or  
accessories.  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or  
portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in  
the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly  
installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of  
wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to  
the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before  
using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.  
Health and Safety Information  
186  
   
Section 12: Warranty Information  
cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG; (c) defects or  
damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object  
when pressing on a touch screen; (d) equipment that has the  
serial number or the enhancement data code removed, defaced,  
damaged, altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects  
or damage resulting from external causes such as collision with  
an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm, lightning, earthquake,  
exposure to weather conditions, theft, blown fuse, or improper  
use of any electrical source; (i) defects or damage resulting from  
cellular signal reception or transmission, or viruses or other  
software problems introduced into the Product; or (j) Product  
used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited  
Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80%  
of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty  
does not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by  
a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC (“SAMSUNG”)  
warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and accessories (“Products”)  
are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal  
use and service for the period commencing upon the date of  
purchase by the first consumer purchaser and continuing for the  
following specified period of time after that date:  
Phone  
1 Year  
1 Year  
90 Days  
1 Year  
Batteries  
Case/Pouch/Holster  
Other Phone Accessories  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the  
Product. This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or  
damage resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use,  
abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid,  
moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents and  
187  
       
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for  
which it is specified.  
the serial number of the Product and the seller’s name and  
address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product,  
please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor  
charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is  
returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty,  
SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNG’s sole  
option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG’s sole  
option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components  
when repairing any Product, or may replace the Product with a  
rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases,  
pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90)  
days. All other repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a  
period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on  
the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer.  
All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and equipment  
shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to any extent  
expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or assignment of  
this Limited Warranty is prohibited.  
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the  
Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty  
service, as some or all of the contents may be deleted or  
reformatted during the course of warranty service.  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY  
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES,  
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN  
NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN  
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR,  
WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS  
OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,  
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING  
FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return  
the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate  
container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or  
comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase,  
Warranty Information  
188  
STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON  
HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER  
OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,  
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY  
TO YOU.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS  
LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE  
QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR  
SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT  
USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO  
INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE  
PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY  
SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY,  
CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF  
ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR  
SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT.  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND  
NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be  
combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other  
person’s or entity’s Product or claim, and specifically, without  
limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances  
proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be  
conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not  
exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable  
law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the  
American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration  
Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision  
is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the  
State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application  
of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with respect  
to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer, representative or  
reseller is authorized to modify or extend this Limited Warranty or  
to make binding representations or claims, whether in  
advertising, presentations or otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG  
regarding the Products or this Limited Warranty.  
189  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive  
of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less  
(“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your  
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part  
of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees,  
expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim  
was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be  
required to pay no more than half of the total administrative,  
facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is  
less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and  
expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”) shall be  
determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the  
arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among  
the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and  
costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator’s award in any  
court of competent jurisdiction.  
the subject line: “Arbitration Opt Out.” You must include in the opt  
out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the  
Product was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model  
number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if  
you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on  
the Product box; (ii) on the Product information screen, which can  
be found under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the  
Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on  
the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later  
than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out  
of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of  
the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the  
benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Severability  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any such  
claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or performance.  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not  
affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty.  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing  
notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of  
the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the Product. To opt out,  
you must send notice by e-mail to [email protected], with  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the  
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a  
Warranty Information  
190  
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve  
and reuse the data by means of special software.  
End User License Agreement for Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement  
(“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual  
or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software  
owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated  
companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that  
accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and  
may include associated media, printed materials, “online” or  
electronic documentation (“Software”). BY CLICKING THE “I  
ACCEPT” BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE  
THE “I ACCEPT”, AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD,  
ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO  
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT  
ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE  
“DECLINE” BUTTON, AND DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this  
sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s  
Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear  
which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to  
default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care  
Center for details.  
Important!: Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service  
at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges  
may apply.  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights  
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this  
EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of  
the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage  
media of one computer and use the Software on a single  
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All rights  
reserved.  
computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make  
the Software available over a network where it could be used by  
multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of  
the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written  
approval.  
Specifications and availability subject to change without notice.  
[111611]  
191  
 
only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or  
other proprietary notices contained on the original.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and  
add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may  
provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain  
your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms  
along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an  
upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by  
Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may  
no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your  
upgrade eligibility.  
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves  
all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software  
is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and  
treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and  
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is  
licensed, not sold.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except  
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by  
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or  
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works  
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense  
or provide commercial hosting services with the Software.  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the  
rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it  
is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the  
Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include  
all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and  
printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not  
retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an  
indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the  
end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA  
terms.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its  
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as  
part of the product support services related to the Software  
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may  
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide  
customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose  
this information in a form that personally identifies you.  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is  
subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to  
comply with all applicable international and national laws that  
apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration  
Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination  
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.  
Warranty Information  
192  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms  
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you  
must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or  
partial, of the Software.  
party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees that  
SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly,  
for any damage or loss caused or alleged to caused by, or in  
connection with, use of or reliance on any such third-party  
content, products, or services available on or through any such  
application. Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that your use of  
any third-party application is governed by such third-party  
application provider’s Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy  
Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or  
personal data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to  
such third-party application provider, will be subject to such  
third-party application provider’s privacy policy, if such a policy  
exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF  
ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party applications  
may be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device.  
SAMSUNG makes no representations whatsoever about any of  
these applications. Since SAMSUNG has no control over such  
applications, Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that  
SAMSUNG is not responsible for the availability of such  
applications and is not responsible or liable for any content,  
advertising, products, services, or other materials on or available  
from such applications. Purchaser expressly acknowledges and  
agrees that use of third-party applications is at Purchaser’s sole  
risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality,  
10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party Applications.  
SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY  
performance, accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to  
Purchaser to take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser  
selects to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan  
horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on  
this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to  
Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,  
sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third-  
REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,  
TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF,  
OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING,  
THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE  
PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR  
OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION  
IS DONE AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND  
193  
PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO  
YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM  
THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY  
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER PURCHASER’S PERSONAL  
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION  
PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL  
ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES THE  
ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR  
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED  
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS  
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,  
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY PURCHASER FROM  
SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF  
WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO  
CREATE ANY WARRANTY.  
INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION  
PROVIDER. ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH  
THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ON AN “AS  
AVAILABLE” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM  
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST  
EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG  
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR  
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR  
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES,  
QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY  
RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT  
WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF  
THE THRID-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS  
CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET  
PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR  
11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO  
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO  
ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN  
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO  
CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN  
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION  
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE  
LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
Warranty Information  
194  
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG’S TOTAL  
LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES  
OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON  
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF  
PURCHASER’S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS  
MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA,  
SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID  
SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION THAT  
WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING  
LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING  
SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM  
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY  
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
(JUNE 1987) or DFAR, 48 CFR 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), as  
applicable.  
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA  
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the  
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly  
excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably  
settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in  
accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial  
Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and  
binding upon the parties.  
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire  
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software  
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written  
communications, proposals and representations with respect to  
the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If  
any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,  
unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full  
force and effect.  
12. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The Software  
is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial  
items" consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial  
software documentation" with only those rights as are granted to  
all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.  
All Software and Products provided to the United States  
Government pursuant to solicitations issued on or after  
Legal Terms and Privacy  
December 1, 1995 is provided with the commercial rights and  
restrictions described elsewhere herein. All Software and  
Products provided to the United States Government pursuant to  
solicitations issued prior to December 1, 1995 are provided with  
RESTRICTED RIGHTS as provided for in FAR, 48 CFR 52.227-14  
Samsung's Social Hub and (if applicable) the website where you  
accessed this Disclaimer (collectively, the "Service"), is being  
made available to you by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., and its  
195  
     
affiliates and suppliers (collectively "Samsung") subject to the  
following enclosed documents:  
website where you accessed these Terms (collectively the  
"Service"). The Terms constitute an agreement between you and  
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd., and its affiliates (collectively  
"Samsung") with respect to the Service. By using the Service,  
you agree to be legally bound to the Terms.  
Social Hub Terms and Conditions which governs your use of the  
Service generally;  
Social Hub End User License Agreement which specifically governs  
your use of the software which forms part of, or enables you to access,  
the Service; and  
You are not allowed to use the Service if you do not agree to the  
Terms. To the extent permitted by applicable law, Samsung  
reserves the right to modify, update, supplement, revise or  
otherwise change the Terms, and to impose new or additional  
rules, policies, terms or conditions in relation to the Service, from  
time to time with or without notice to you ("Amendments").  
Social Hub Privacy Policy which governs our collection and use of  
personal information in connection with your access to and use of the  
Service.  
By using the Service, you agree to be bound by the above  
documents. Please read through those documents to make sure  
you understand the basis on which Samsung is providing the  
Service to you.  
Samsung may provide you with notice of the Amendments by  
sending an email message to the email address listed in your  
account information (if any), or by posting the notice on the  
Social Hub website.  
You will be able to access additional features available at  
socialhub.samsungmobile.com  
.
Such Amendments will be effective immediately and  
incorporated into the Terms upon sending or posting of such  
notice. You are responsible for regularly reviewing the Terms.  
Your continued use of the Service will be deemed to constitute  
your acceptance of any and all such Amendments.  
Social Hub Terms and Conditions  
Acceptance of the Terms  
These Social Hub Terms and Conditions together with the Social  
Hub Privacy Policy and Social Hub End User Licence Agreement  
(collectively "Terms") govern your use of Social Hub, which  
comprises all content and services accessible through Social Hub  
(including third party content and services), and (if applicable) the  
Eligibility  
To use the Service, you must be at least sixteen (16) years of  
age. If you are at least sixteen (16 ) years of age but are a minor  
for legal purposes where you live, you must review the Terms  
Warranty Information  
196  
 
and have your parent or legal guardian accept the Terms on your  
behalf in order for you to use the Service. The person accepting  
the Terms on your behalf must be legally competent.  
("Material") when your access to the Service is terminated. Your  
submission of Material in the course of using the Service does  
not transfer ownership rights in the Material to Samsung. After  
the Material is removed from the Service by either you or  
Samsung, some traces of the Material may remain and copies of  
the Material may still reside within the servers used in providing  
the Service. However, Samsung does not claim ownership in  
your Material.  
Your Information  
When required to provide information in connection with your use  
of the Service, you agree to provide truthful and complete  
information. Providing misleading information about your identity  
is forbidden. When you first use the Service, you may be  
required to create a username and a password.  
You represent and warrant that you have obtained any consents,  
permission or licenses that may be required for you to have the  
legal right to submit any Material. Samsung reserves the right to  
terminate your access to the Service if Samsung determines, at  
its sole discretion, that you have repeatedly submitted infringing  
Materials to the Service.  
You (and your parent or legal guardian, if you are a minor) are  
personally responsible for any use of the Service with your  
username and password.  
You agree to take due care in protecting your username and  
password against misuse by others and promptly notify Samsung  
about any misuse.  
Using the Service  
You agree to:  
Termination of Service  
Use the Service only for your private, non-commercial purposes;  
Comply with applicable laws, the Terms and good manners;  
Not submit unlawful, offensive, abusive, pornographic, harassing,  
libelous or other inappropriate Material;  
Samsung may terminate or restrict your access to certain parts  
of the Service if there is an indication that you have breached the  
Terms or at any time in its sole discretion.  
Your Material  
Respect the privacy of others;  
Obtain any consents, permission or licenses that may be required for  
you to have the legal right to submit any Material; and  
Except as set forth in the Social Hub Privacy Policy, Samsung  
shall not be responsible for any removal of the information or  
content you have submitted in the course of using the Service  
197  
Not distribute or post spam, unreasonably large files, chain letters,  
pyramid schemes, viruses or any other technologies that may harm  
the Service, or the interest or property of the Service users.  
you from doing so, you are not allowed to disassemble, reverse  
engineer, tamper with the Service, transmit malicious code or  
collect information of other users through the Service.  
Unauthorized use of the Service (including any use in  
contravention of the Terms) is prohibited and may result in  
criminal prosecution and/or civil liability.  
You may not take any action to interrupt the functionality of or  
tamper with the Service or any content or service contained in or  
provided through the Service, or any servers used in providing  
the Service, or to unreasonably affect others' enjoyment of the  
Service in any way.  
Restrictions  
You and any third party directed by You must not display, copy,  
store, modify, sell, publish or redistribute the Service (whether all  
or any portion of it), and such displaying, copying, storing,  
modification, sale, publishing and redistribution shall be  
prohibited unless you have obtained all necessary rights and  
permissions from Samsung and the owners and right holders of  
such the Service or relevant part.  
Actions Required by Law  
Samsung may need to comply with lawful interception and/or  
data retention requirements imposed by your country of  
residence or any other country in which you use the Service.  
Samsung may restrict access to any part of the Service or  
terminate your access to the Service, at any time in its sole  
discretion if required by law or by the relevant authorities or  
regulatory agencies to do so.  
You must not use the Service for any purposes other than those  
permitted under the Terms. Without limiting this restriction, you  
must not use the service for any illegal purposes, to make  
unsolicited offers or advertisements, to impersonate or falsely  
claim affiliation with any person or entity, to misrepresent,  
harass, defraud or defame others, to post obscene or  
unreasonably offensive material, to negatively present the  
Service, nor for any commercial purposes.  
Third Party Sites and Content  
The Service may allow access to sites on the Internet that are  
owned or operated by third parties. Access to such sites does not  
imply that Samsung endorses the site or the conduct, products or  
services on the site. Upon accessing any such site, you must  
review and agree to the rules of use of the relevant site before  
using the site.  
Except as expressly permitted by the Terms, and except to the  
extent that applicable laws prevent Samsung from restraining  
Warranty Information  
198  
You acknowledge and agree that Samsung has no control over  
the content, products or services of third-party sites and does not  
assume any responsibility for or in respect of such content,  
products or services. Third party content and services may be  
terminated or interrupted at any time, and Samsung makes no  
representation or warranty that any content or service will remain  
available for any period of time. Samsung expressly disclaims  
any responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of  
any third party content or service.  
discontinue the Service or any part thereof in its sole discretion.  
In such case you will be provided with prior notification.  
Samsung does not represent or warrant that the Service, or any  
part thereof, is appropriate or available for use in any particular  
jurisdiction. If you choose to access the Service, you do so on  
you own initiative and at you own risk, and you are responsible  
for complying with all US federal, state and local laws, rules and  
regulations.  
Dealings with Others  
In addition, Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for  
customer service related to third party sites. Any question or  
request for service relating to third party sites should be made  
directly to the relevant site operator.  
You may interact with other users on or through the Service. You  
agree that any such interactions do not involve Samsung and are  
solely between you and the other user(s).  
Intellectual Property  
Subscription Information  
The Service and related software are protected under  
international copyright laws and you are hereby notified that  
copyrights are claimed by Samsung.  
Use of the Service may involve transmission of data through your  
service provider's network. Your network service provider may  
charge you for such data transmission. Samsung assumes no  
responsibility for the payment of any such charges.  
Subject to the Terms, Samsung retains all right, title and interest  
in the Service and in all Samsung's products, software and other  
properties provided to you or used by you through the Service.  
Availability  
The Service may be network dependent - contact your network  
service provider for more information. Samsung reserves the  
right, in its sole discretion, to change, improve and correct the  
Service. The Service may not be available during maintenance  
breaks and other times. Samsung may also decide to  
Personal Data  
The Social Hub Privacy Policy and the following additional  
provisions govern the use of your personal information. When you  
access the Service, Samsung may ask for or otherwise collect  
199  
certain personal information such as your email address along  
with your user name and password and, in certain cases, your  
mobile phone number so that we can communicate with you, for  
example to send notifications of incoming messages. When you  
use the Service, certain technical information such as the type  
and serial number of your mobile device, Internet protocol  
address, your mobile network and country codes, timezone,  
technical details of your client as well as your transactions with  
Samsung, for example your acceptance of the Terms, will be  
automatically collected by Samsung.  
purpose other than as necessary to deliver and manage your  
messages, unless otherwise required by law.  
In connection with certain services accessible via the Service,  
Samsung may cooperate with your operator and other third  
parties. Samsung may receive from such third parties certain  
device specific non-personal information, such as device serial  
number of the devices sold by the operator with preinstalled  
software for the Service. Such information may be used for  
aanalyzing the activation of the Service.  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
The purposes for which Samsung may use such data are  
explained in the Social Hub Privacy Policy. Samsung may also  
participate with your selected service providers in maintaining  
your contact lists.  
THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE"  
BASIS. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND  
SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT THAT  
THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR OR VIRUS-  
FREE. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND  
SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO  
WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, IS MADE IN RELATION TO THE  
AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OF THE SERVICE,  
INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION OR CONTENT PROVIDED  
THROUGH THE SERVICE. YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE AND  
The third party services and content you access through the  
Service and the telecommunications carriers and the network  
through which you access the Service are provided and hosted  
by your selected third party content and service providers who  
typically has a privacy policy of its own. We recommend you  
familiarize yourself with your service provider's privacy policy.  
Samsung is not responsible for the privacy or any other practices  
of such service providers. Although your messages will be  
transmitted through Samsung's servers, Samsung will not  
process the content or headers of your messages for any  
ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR  
Warranty Information  
200  
   
SOLE RISK AND THAT YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO CONTENT FROM  
VARIOUS SOURCES.  
STATUTORY PROVISIONS APPLY, TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH  
SAMSUNG IS ABLE TO DO SO, SAMSUNG LIMITS ITS LIABILITY  
UNDER THOSE PROVISIONS TO, AT ITS OPTION, IN THE CASE OF  
SERVICES (A) THE SUPPLYING OF THE SERVICES AGAIN;  
SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY THIRD  
PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE THAT MAY BE ACCESSED  
THROUGH THE SERVICE, NOR SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD  
RESPONSIBLE FOR MALICIOUS CODE CONTAINED ON OR  
DISTRIBUTED THROUGH BY THIRD PARTIES.  
OR (B) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE SERVICES  
SUPPLIED AGAIN AND, IN THE CASE OF GOODS, (A) THE  
REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS OR THE SUPPLY OF EQUIVALENT  
GOODS; (B) THE REPAIR OF THE GOODS; (C) THE PAYMENT OF  
THE COST OF REPLACING THE GOODS OR OF ACQUIRING  
EQUIVALENT GOODS; OR (D) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF  
HAVING THE GOODS REPAIRED.  
YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES,  
LOSSES, COSTS, OR HARM ARISING FROM YOUR USE OF OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE SERVICE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY  
LAW, EXCEPT FOR LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY  
CAUSED BY GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR INTENTIONAL MISCONDUCT,  
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITIES WITH RESPECT TO YOUR  
USE OF THE SERVICE (INCLUDING DIRECT, INDIRECT,  
Indemnification  
You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Samsung from  
and against any and all third party claims and all liabilities,  
assessments, losses, costs or damages resulting from or arising  
out of i) your breach of the Terms, ii) your infringement or  
violation of any intellectual property, other rights or privacy of a  
third party, iii) misuse of the Service by a third party where such  
misuse was made possible due to your failure to take reasonable  
measures to protect your username and password against  
misuse.  
INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES).  
IF THERE IS A CLAIM THAT WE HAVE BREACHED ANY OF THE  
PROVISIONS IN THE TERMS, THIS DOES NOT AFFECT OR  
INVALIDATE THE OTHER PROVISIONS.  
CERTAIN STATUTORY PROVISIONS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW MAY  
IMPLY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR IMPOSE OBLIGATIONS  
UPON SAMSUNG WHICH CANNOT BE EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED  
OR MODIFIED OR CANNOT BE EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR  
MODIFIED EXCEPT TO A LIMITED EXTENT. THE TERMS MUST BE  
READ SUBJECT TO THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS. IF THESE  
201  
Choice of Law  
provision of the Terms will not constitute a waiver of such  
provision, or any other provision of the Terms.  
Except where prohibited by applicable law or provided otherwise  
herein, the Terms shall be governed by the laws of the State of  
New York without regard to its conflict of law provisions.  
Samsung will not be liable or responsible for any failure to fulfill  
any of its obligations under the Terms which failure is due to any  
cause or condition beyond the reasonable control of Samsung. If  
there is any conflict between these Social Hub Terms and  
Conditions and the Social Hub Privacy Policy, the provisions of  
these Social Hub Terms and Conditions shall prevail. The  
provisions of the Terms that are intended to or by their nature  
should survive termination of your use of the Service shall remain  
valid after any such termination.  
You and Samsung agree to submit to the non-exclusive  
jurisdiction of the competent courts in the State of New York to  
resolve any legal matters arising from the Terms.  
Notwithstanding this, you agree that Samsung shall still be  
allowed to apply for injunctive remedies (or equivalent type of  
urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.  
Miscellaneous  
Social Hub Privacy Policy  
The Terms (including all documents comprising the Terms)  
constitute the entire agreement between you and Samsung, and  
supersedes any prior agreement between you and Samsung,  
with respect to your use of the Service. Your use of any third-  
party content or service accessed via the Service will be  
governed by the terms and conditions furnished with, and  
applicable to that content or service. If any provision of the Terms  
is held invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that portion of the Terms  
shall be construed in a manner consistent with applicable law to  
reflect, as nearly as possible, the original intentions of the  
parties, and the remaining portion of the Terms shall remain in  
full force and effect. Samsung's failure to enforce any right or  
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") is committed to  
protecting the online privacy of visitors, users and customers to  
our Social Hub service. This privacy policy ( "Privacy Policy")  
forms part of the Terms which govern your use of Social  
Hub(excluding any third party content and services), and (if  
applicable) the website where you accessed this Privacy Policy,  
(collectively, the "Service"). The purpose of the Privacy Policy is  
to inform you about the types of information we gather about you  
when you access or use the Service, how we may use that  
information, and if and how we disclose it to third parties.  
All users of the Service are required to provide true, current,  
complete and accurate personal information when prompted and  
Warranty Information  
202  
   
we will reject and delete any entry that we believe in good faith  
to be incorrect, false, falsified, or fraudulent, or inconsistent with  
or in violation of the Privacy Policy.  
work telephone number in the course of you accessing or using  
the Service, such as via registration forms, surveys, and polls. In  
each such case, you will know what categories of information we  
collect because you will actively provide the information to us.  
You may not be able to fully utilize all of the features or  
components of the Service if you choose not to provide certain  
information. If you do choose to give us personal information  
through the Service, we will collect and retain that information.  
We will provide you with an opportunity to give your consent in  
relation to your use of the Service. Separate from such consent,  
your access or use of the Service will be construed as your  
acceptance of the Privacy Policy and of our collection, use,  
disclosure, management and storage of your personal  
information as described below. We may, from time to time,  
transfer or merge any personal information collected off-line to  
our online databases or store off-line information in an electronic  
format. We may also combine personal information we collect  
online with information available from other sources, including  
information received from our affiliates, marketing companies, or  
advertisers. This Privacy Policy covers all such personal  
information and will remain in full force and effect as long as you  
are a user of the Service, even if your use of or participation in  
any particular service, feature, function or promotional activity  
terminates, expires, ceases, is suspended or deactivated for any  
reason.  
Non-Personal Information  
When you use the Service, we may also collect "non-personal"  
information. We consider "non-personal information" to be  
information that, by itself, cannot be used to identify or contact  
you personally, such as demographic information (your age,  
gender, income, education, profession, zip code, etc.). Non-  
personal information may also include technical information,  
such as your IP address and other anonymous data involving your  
use of the Service.  
Non-personal information may also include information that you  
provide us through your use of the Service, such as the terms  
you enter into the search functions of Social Hub, mail inbox and  
instant messenger. We reserve the right to use or disclose non-  
personal information in any way we see fit.  
INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT  
Personal Information  
We may request that you supply us with "personal" information,  
such as your name, e-mail address, mailing address, home or  
203  
   
information about the Service or our advertisers will be sent to  
your e-mail address. We will provide you with the option to  
change your preferences and opt-out of receiving those  
communications. You may request at any time that we not e-mail  
you in future by clicking the "unsubscribe" link which is included  
at the bottom of any e-mail that you receive from us. If you  
unsubscribe, we will make reasonable efforts to discontinue e-  
mail communications to you as soon as practicable.  
USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT  
Our Services  
We use your personal information to provide you with any  
services that you may request or require, to communicate with  
you and to allow you to participate in online surveys. We use  
aggregated non-personal information about our users to  
understand the demographics of users of the Service, such as  
the percentage of male and female users, the geographic  
distribution of our users, the age ranges of our users, a  
combination of these and/or other demographics. We may also  
use the personal or non-personal information we collect to  
analyze how Service is being used, and to improve the content of  
the Service, and for marketing and promotional efforts.  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO THIRD  
PARTIES  
Aggregate Information  
Except as specifically set forth in this Privacy Policy, we do not  
share your personal information with any third party without your  
permission. We may disclose aggregate information, such as  
demographic information, and our statistical analyses to third  
parties, including advertisers or other business partners. This  
aggregate information does not include your personal  
information.  
E-mail Communications  
If you send us an e-mail with questions or comments, we may  
use your personal information to respond to your questions or  
comments, and we may save your questions or comments for  
future reference. Aside from our reply to such an e-mail, it is not  
our standard practice to send you e-mail unless you request a  
particular service that involves e-mail communications.  
However, you consent to us contacting you by e-mail, and  
sending you information about products and services which we  
believe may be of interest to you. You may have the opportunity  
to subscribe to an electronic newsletter in which case  
Service Providers  
We sometimes engage unaffiliated businesses to assist us in  
providing you certain services. For example, we may use third  
parties to provide advertising, marketing and promotional  
assistance, provide e-mail services, or facilitate our online  
services. In those instances, we may need to share your personal  
Warranty Information  
204  
     
information with them. We require these companies to use your  
personal information only to provide the particular product or  
service and do not authorize them to use your personal  
information for any other reason.  
Other Disclosures  
We may disclose personal information when we are required or  
requested to do so by law, court order or other government or  
law enforcement authority or regulatory agency; to enforce or  
apply our rights and agreements; or when we believe in good  
faith that disclosing this information is necessary or advisable,  
including, for example, to protect the rights, property, or safety of  
the Service and Samsung, our users, or others.  
We sometimes offer promotions in conjunction with a third party  
sponsor.  
If you choose to participate in those promotions, we may share  
your information with the sponsor if they need it to send you a  
product or other special promotion they offer.  
CHILDREN  
Third Party Advertisers  
The Service is not designed for use by children without their  
parent's supervision. We ask that anyone under the age of  
sixteen (16) not submit any personal information through the  
Service. We do not knowingly collect any personal information  
from children under the age of eighteen, and therefore we do not  
knowingly distribute such information to third parties.  
We may use third-party advertising companies to deliver specific  
advertisements to you. These companies may collect non-  
personal information about your visits to Social Hub in order to  
provide advertisements about products and services that may be  
of interest to you. These companies may also aggregate your  
non-personal information for use in targeted advertising,  
marketing research, and other similar purposes. These  
companies may place their own cookies on your computer. If you  
want to prevent a third-party advertiser from collecting and using  
this information, you may visit each third party advertiser's  
website directly and opt-out.  
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE COLLECT  
The security of your personal information is important to us. We  
maintain physical, electronic, and procedural safeguards to  
secure your personal information. However, there is always some  
risk in transmitting information electronically. The personal  
information we collect is stored within databases that we control.  
As we deem appropriate, we use security measures consistent  
with industry standards, such as firewalls and encryption  
205  
     
technology, to protect your information. However, we cannot  
guarantee the security of our databases, nor can we guarantee  
that information you supply won't be intercepted while being  
transmitted to us over the Internet.  
information or stop receiving communication from us, sign in to  
the Service and then select 'update your profile' to change your  
preferences.  
CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES  
CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC AREAS  
Registration may be required to enter promotions such as  
contests and sweepstakes on Social Hub. These registration or  
entry processes may require your submission of personal  
information such as your first and last name, street address, city,  
state and zip code, e-mail address, telephone number and date  
of birth. The entry page and/or rules for the promotion will  
provide the specific requirements for the promotion. You may  
also have the opportunity to opt-in to special offers from our  
advertisers in connection with these promotions.  
Our third party service and content providers may offer chat, user  
reviews, bulletin boards, or other public functions and any  
posting by you is considered public information available to other  
users. Any posting is governed in accordance with the third party  
service and content providers' terms and conditions. You should  
take care not to use personal information in your screen name or  
other information that might be publicly available to other users.  
Archived Information  
ACCURACYOFTHEINFORMATIONWECOLLECT  
We maintain archives of web logs, database, and other systems  
and information in relation to the Service. Please note that it is  
possible some of this information may remain archived after we  
delete the information from its active database. We maintain  
archives for disaster recovery, legal and other non-marketing  
purposes.  
Any questions you may have regarding this Privacy Policy, the  
accuracy of your personal information or the use of your personal  
information, or any requests that we correct, update, or remove  
your information in our databases, should be directed via e-mail  
to [email protected], or via regular mail to:  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive, Richardson, TX 75082  
Attn: Customer Support Department  
How can I update my profile?  
You can help us maintain the accuracy of your profile by notifying  
us when you change zip/postal code, country of residence, age  
range, or e-mail address. If at any time you wish to update your  
Warranty Information  
206  
     
After receiving a request to change your information, we will  
make reasonable efforts to ensure that all of your personal  
information stored in databases we actively use to operate the  
Service will be updated, corrected, changed or deleted, as  
appropriate, as soon as reasonably practicable. However, we  
reserve the right to retain in our archival files any information we  
remove from or change in our active databases. We may retain  
such information to resolve disputes, troubleshoot problems and  
enforce our Terms.  
Social Hub End User License Agreement  
1. SOCIAL HUB  
This end user license ("License") allows you to use Social Hub  
("Software") made available on your mobile device. This License  
is a legally binding agreement between you and Samsung  
Electronics Co. Ltd. the ("Licensor").  
2. LICENSE  
2.1 Licensor grants you for the term of this License a limited,  
personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to use the  
Software in object code executable only form on a single device  
for non-commercial uses.  
In addition, it is not technologically possible to remove each and  
every record of the information you have provided to us. A copy  
of your personal information may exist in a non-erasable form  
that will be difficult or impossible for us to locate.  
2.2 All rights not expressly granted to you under this License are  
reserved to Licensor, and you agree not to take or permit any  
action with respect to the Software that is not expressly  
authorised under this License. For the avoidance of doubt, you  
have no right to use, incorporate into other products, copy,  
modify, translate or transfer to any third party the Software or any  
modification, adaptation or copy of the Software or any part  
thereof, nor to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the  
binary code of the Software, either in whole or in part, except as  
expressly provided in this License.  
CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY  
This Privacy Policy is effective as of May 29, 2010 and complies  
with Samsung's Corporate Privacy Policy. We reserve the right to  
change this Privacy Policy at any time, and will post any such  
changes to this Privacy Policy on the Social Hub website. Please  
refer back to the Social Hub website on a regular basis to obtain  
the most up to date Privacy Policy.  
2.3 The Software is licensed to you only. You may not rent,  
lease, sub-license, sell, assign, pledge, transfer or otherwise  
207  
   
dispose of the Software, on a temporary or permanent basis  
without the prior written consent of Licensor.  
4.2.2 already in your possession, provided that Licensee can  
show such possession from written records (other than as a  
result of a breach of this clause 4); or  
3. OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS  
4.2.3 which you can demonstrate is in the public domain (other  
than as a result of a breach of this  
clause 4).  
3.1 Your only right to use the Software is by virtue of this License  
and you acknowledge that all intellectual property rights in or  
relating to the Software and all parts of the Software are and  
shall remain the exclusive property of Licensor or its licensors.  
4.3 To the extent that any information is necessarily disclosed  
pursuant to a statutory or regulatory obligation or court order,  
such disclosure shall not be a breach of this clause 4 provided  
you do what you can to prevent any such disclosure.  
3.2 You agree that you will not remove or alter any copyright  
notices or similar proprietary devices, including without limitation  
any electronic watermarks or other identifiers, that may be  
incorporated in the Software or any copy of the Software.  
5. WARRANTY AND SUPPORT  
4. CONFIDENTIALITY  
The Software is provided "as is" with no representation,  
guarantee or warranty of any kind as to its functionality or that it  
does not and will not infringe any third party rights (including  
intellectual property rights). Licensor has no obligation under this  
License to provide technical or other support to you.  
4.1 The structure, organisation and source code of the Software  
are the valuable trade secrets and proprietary confidential  
information of Licensor and its licensors. You agree not to  
provide or disclose any such confidential information in the  
Software or derived from it to any third party.  
6. LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY  
4.2 The provisions of clause 4.1 will not apply to any information  
which is:  
6.1 Licensor does not exclude its liability (if any) to you:  
6.1.1 for personal injury or death resulting from Licensor's  
negligence;  
4.2.1 lawfully obtained free of any duty of confidentiality  
(otherwise than directly or indirectly from Licensor); or  
6.1.2 for fraud; or  
Warranty Information  
208  
6.1.3 for any matter for which it would be illegal for Licensor to  
exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability.  
6.3.1 THE SOFTWARE, OR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OR  
SUPPLY, OR FAILURE OR DELAY IN SUPPLY, OF THE SOFTWARE BY  
LICENSOR OR ON THE PART OF LICENSOR'S EMPLOYEES,  
AGENTS OR SUB-CONTRACTORS;  
6.2 LICENSOR MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH  
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND LICENSOR HEREBY EXCLUDES  
(TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE IN LAW), ALL  
CONDITIONS, WARRANTIES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION  
ANY WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR  
REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE  
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE) AND STIPULATIONS, EXPRESS  
(OTHER THAN THOSE SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE) OR IMPLIED,  
STATUTORY, CUSTOMARY OR OTHERWISE WHICH, BUT FOR  
SUCH EXCLUSION, WOULD OR MIGHT SUBSIST IN FAVOUR OF  
YOU. EXCEPT AS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE YOU ASSUME THE  
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE  
SOFTWARE.  
6.3.2 ANY BREACH BY LICENSOR OF ANY OF THE EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED TERMS OF THIS LICENSE;  
6.3.3 ANY USE MADE OF THE SOFTWARE; OR  
6.3.4 ANY STATEMENT MADE OR NOT MADE, OR ADVICE GIVEN  
OR NOT GIVEN, BY OR ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR.  
6.4 Disclaimer of Certain Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
SAMSUNG BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY PARTY RELATED TO YOU  
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS, EVEN IF  
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE  
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER FRAUD, MISREPRESENTATION,  
BREACH OF CONTRACT, NEGILIGENCE, PERSONAL INJURY,  
PRODUCTS LIABILITY, INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT,  
OR ANY OTHER THEORY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT  
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES. THIS MEANS THAT YOU WILL NOT SEEK, AND HEREBY  
WAIVE, ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, TREBLE, OR  
PUNITIVE DAMAGES FROM SAMSUNG. THIS LIMITATION AND  
WAIVER ALSO APPLIES TO ANY CLAIMS YOU MAY BRING AGAINST  
6.3 SUBJECT TO CLAUSE 6.1 LICENSOR WILL BE UNDER NO  
LIABILITY TO YOU WHATSOEVER (WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), BREACH OF STATUTORY DUTY,  
RESTITUTION OR OTHERWISE) FOR ANY INJURY, DEATH, DAMAGE  
OR DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS (ALL THREE OF  
WHICH TERMS INCLUDE, WITHOUT LIMITATION, PURE ECONOMIC  
LOSS, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF DATA,  
LOSS OF SAVINGS, DEPLETION OF GOODWILL AND LIKE LOSS)  
HOWSOEVER CAUSED ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION  
WITH:  
209  
ANY OTHER PARTY TO THE EXTENT THAT SAMSUNG WOULD BE  
REQUIRED TO INDEMNIFY THAT PARTY FOR SUCH CLAIM.  
8. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION  
8.1 The formation, existence, construction, performance, validity  
and all aspects whatsoever of this License or of any term of this  
License will be governed by the laws of the State of New York.  
6.5 You acknowledge that the above provisions of this clause 6  
are reasonable for the Software and you will accept such risk  
and/or insure accordingly.  
8.2 The courts in New York City will have non-exclusive  
jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in  
connection with this License. The parties irrevocably agree to  
submit to that jurisdiction.  
6.6 Any rights that you have as a consumer are not affected by  
this clause 6.  
7. TERM AND TERMINATION  
9. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW  
7.1 This License shall commence upon the earlier of your  
acceptance of this License or your activation of the Software and  
shall continue until terminated in accordance with clause 7.2 or  
otherwise in accordance with this License.  
You acknowledge and agree that notwithstanding the fact that  
this License is governed by the laws of the Republic of Korea, you  
may be subject to additional laws in other jurisdictions with  
respect to your use of the Software. You will comply with the  
laws of any jurisdiction that apply to the Software, including  
without limitation any applicable export laws or regulations.  
7.2 This License will terminate automatically if you fail to comply  
with any term or condition of this License or if you cease to use  
the Software for any reason.  
10.GENERAL  
7.3 Upon termination of this License for any reason whatsoever  
Licensor retains the right to permanently disable your access to  
the Software.  
10.1 If any clause or part of this License is found by any court,  
tribunal, administrative body or authority of competent  
jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable then that  
provision will, to the extent required, be severed from this  
License and will be ineffective without, as far as is possible,  
modifying any other clause or part of this License and this will  
7.4 The termination of this License howsoever arising is without  
prejudice to the rights, duties and liabilities of either party  
accrued prior to termination. Clauses 2.2, 2.3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.3, 8,  
9 and 10 of this License will continue to be enforceable  
notwithstanding termination.  
Warranty Information  
210  
not affect any other provisions of this License which will remain  
in full force and effect.  
10.2 No failure or delay by any party to exercise any right, power  
or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any partial  
exercise preclude any further exercise of the same, or of some  
other right, power or remedy.  
10.3 The parties to this License do not intend that any of its  
terms will be enforceable by any person not a party to it.  
10.4 This License contains all the terms which the parties have  
agreed in relation to the subject matter of this License and  
supersedes any prior written or oral agreements, representations  
or understandings between the parties in relation to such subject  
matter.  
10.5 Licensor reserves the right to revise the terms of this  
License by updating the License on its web site, or by notifying  
you by post or by e-mail. You are advised to check the Licensor's  
website periodically for notices concerning revisions. Your  
continued use of the Software shall be deemed to constitute  
acceptance of any revised terms.  
10.6 You will be deemed to have accepted the terms of this  
License by using the Software on any device.  
211  
Section 13: Samsung Product Registration  
Sign Up Now  
Customize your Samsung device experience  
• Activate product warranty  
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account  
• No monthly fees  
Get More  
• Latest info on promotions, events and special offers on related products  
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion  
• Great deals on downloads  
Register now at  
www.samsung.com/register  
Scan this code to go  
directly to the registration page.  
Samsung Product Registration  
212  
 
Index  
Amazon Kindle 140  
Android Market 152  
Android System Recovery 11  
Applications  
A
C
Abc mode 53  
Calculator 142  
Calendar 143  
Call Functions 41  
Adding a New Contact  
Idle Screen 57  
Using the Camcorder 82  
Using the Camera 76  
World Clock 145  
AT&T Code Scanner 140  
AT&T Music  
Address Book 57  
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)  
Address Book 43  
Adjusting the Call Volume 47  
Answering a Call 43  
Call Back Missed Call 45  
Call Duration 47  
Call Log 44  
Call Waiting 51  
Adding a New Contact 57  
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers  
Copying an entry to the Phone 66  
Copying Entry to Phone 66  
Copying Entry to SIM Card 66  
Deleting Address Book Entries 67  
Dialing a Number 60  
Playlists 71  
AT&T Navigator 141  
B
Back key 29  
Favorites 65  
Finding an Address Book Entry 60  
Group Settings 64  
Battery  
charging 8  
Installing 7  
Correcting the Number 42  
Dialing a Recent Number 42  
Ending a Call 42  
Managing Address Book Entries 66  
Service Dialing Numbers 67  
Using Contacts List 60  
Address Book Options 63  
Adobe PDF 158  
Low Battery Indicator 9  
Battery Use & Safety 174  
Bluetooth  
Sending contacts 136  
Books 142  
International Call 41  
Making a Call 41  
Manual Pause Dialing 41  
Options During a Call 47  
Putting a Call on Hold 48  
Saving the Missed Call Number to  
Address Book 45  
Airplane mode 97  
Alarm 144  
Browser 125  
213  
 
Searching for a Number in Address  
Book 51  
Using the Speakerphone 50  
Viewing All Calls 44  
Viewing Missed Calls 44  
Camcorder 82  
Crayon Physics 147  
Creating a Playlist 71  
D
Diary 153  
Display  
Using Swype 55  
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 54  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Sig-  
nals 167  
F
icons 20  
Facebook 148  
Accessing the Video Folder 85  
Camcorder Options 82  
Shooting Video 82  
Display / Touch-Screen 177  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices 183  
FCC Notice and Cautions 185  
Featured Apps 148  
G
Camera 76  
Downloads 147  
Accessing the Pictures Folder 80  
Camera Options 77, 82  
Picture Folder 80  
E
E-mail  
Gallery 74  
Synchronizing a Corporate Email  
Account 92  
Email 92  
Creating Additional Email Accounts  
viewing pictures 75  
viewing videos 75  
Getting Started 5  
Setting Up Your Phone 5  
Gmail 94  
Google Maps 151  
Google Search Bar 28  
GPS & AGPS 178  
Group  
Adding an Entry 64  
Editing 65  
Removing an Entry 64  
Group Settings  
Taking Pictures 76  
Care and Maintenance 179  
Changing Your Settings 97  
Charging battery 8  
Children and Cell Phones 170  
Clock 144  
Code Scanner 140  
Commercial Mobile Alerting System  
(CMAS) 173  
Switching Between Email Accounts  
Emergency Calls 179  
Entering Text 52  
Changing the Text Entry Mode 53  
Using 123Sym Mode 54  
Using Abc Mode 53  
Using Android Keyboard 55  
Contacts 57  
Cookies  
Emptying 128  
214  
Editing a Caller Group 65  
microSDHC card 6, 39  
Mini Diary 153  
Mobile Video 74  
Mobile Web 125  
Entering Text in the Mobile Web  
Browser 126  
Navigating with the Mobile Web 125  
Using Bookmarks 127  
Motion 115  
Multimedia 68  
Music File Extensions  
3GP 69  
AAC 69  
AAC+ 69  
M
H
Haptic feedback 108  
Health and Safety Information 167  
Home key 29  
I
Icons  
Application 23  
Indicator 20  
Icons, description 20  
In-Call Options 47  
International Call 41  
Internet 125  
Maps 151  
Market 152  
Media Hub 25, 68  
Memory Card 39  
Memory Card Installation 6  
Menu  
key 29  
Menu Navigation 29  
Message Options 88  
Message Search 91  
Messaging  
Creating and Sending Text  
Messages 87  
J
eAAC+ 69  
M4A 69  
MP3 69  
MP4 69  
Deleting a message 90  
Gmail 94  
Joining Contacts 61  
K
Options 88  
Settings 91  
Keypad  
Changing Text Input 53  
Kindle 140  
WMA 69  
Signing into Email 92  
Signing into Gmail 94  
Types of Messages 87  
MicroSD Card 6  
microSD card 39  
Installing 6  
Music Player 69  
adding music 71  
creating a playlist 71  
removing music 71  
Mute 48, 50  
L
Landscape 52  
Latitude 149  
Legal Terms and Privacy 195  
Live TV 72  
My Files 155  
Removing 7  
215  
myAT&T 155  
Pictures 74  
Safe Mode 12  
Gallery 74  
Places 158  
Polaris Office 158  
Polaris® Office 27, 158  
Powering  
Off 9  
On 9  
Predictive text 54  
Samsung Apps 162  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recy-  
cling 175  
SD Card 39  
Search Bar 28  
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE  
COLLECT 205  
Service Dialing Numbers 67  
Settings  
enabling wireless network locations  
Shortcuts 19  
Show Suggestions 54  
SIM card  
installation 5  
Installing 5  
Smart Practices While Driving 173  
Snooze 145  
Social Hub 162, 195  
INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY 200  
USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT  
N
Navigation 156  
command keys 29  
context-sensitive menus 29  
terms used 29  
touch gestures 29  
Navigation Options 156  
Navigator 141  
Near Field Communication (NFC) 138  
News 157  
News & Weather 157  
Noise reduction 48  
O
Operating Environment 182  
Other Important Safety Information 186  
P
PC Connections 136  
Pen Settings 122  
Phone  
Q
Qik Lite 73  
QWERTY keypad 52  
R
Ready2Go 10  
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 169  
Reject List 47  
Reject list 47  
Responsible Listening 180  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 185  
S
Front View 13  
icons 20  
Rear View 16  
Side View 15  
S Pen  
Pen Settings 122  
Switching On/Off 9  
216  
Social Hub Privacy Policy 202  
Social Hub Terms and Conditions 196  
Speakerphone Key 50  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certifi-  
cation Information 171  
Stopwatch 146  
TTY Mode 105  
From Another Phone 11  
Voice Recorder 163  
Voicemail  
Setup 11  
Volume 107  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 177  
Understanding Your Phone 13  
Features of Your Phone 13  
Front View 13  
Rear View 16  
Side Views 15  
W
Swap 49  
SWYPE  
Warranty Information 187  
Weather 157  
entering text using 55  
Swype Settings 56  
Symbol/Numeric mode 54  
System memory 117  
System Recovery 11  
T
Task Manager 163  
Text Input  
Abc mode 53  
Methods 52  
numeric mode 54  
symbol mode 54  
Timer 146  
Touch Screen 9  
USB connection modes 136  
USB connections  
as a mass storage device 137  
USB settings  
as a mass storage device 137  
mass storage device 137  
USB storage 117  
Use wireless networks 110  
Using Favorites  
Adding Favorites 127  
Deleting a Favorite 128  
Editing Favorites 128  
V
Video Chat 73  
Video Player 74  
Web 125  
Widgets  
Android Market 25  
Calculator 24  
Camera 24  
Gmail 25, 148  
Settings 27, 162  
Video Player 27  
Voice Recorder 28, 163  
Voice Search 28  
YouTube 28  
Wi-Fi Direct 98, 132  
World Clock  
Deleting an Entry 146  
World clock 145  
Write and Go 165  
Lock/Unlock 9  
Travel Charger 8  
Using 8  
Voice Mail  
Accessing 11  
217  
Y
Yellowpages 165  
YouTube 165  
YPmobile (Yellow Pages mobile) 165  
218  

Transcend Information JetFlash V90 Classic User Manual
Sony S2 Sports Walkman WM FS555 User Manual
Sony MDX C6500X User Manual
Seagate MOMENTUS 54006 SATA ST9500325ASG User Manual
Samsung L770 User Manual
Research In Motion Blackberry Cell Phone RDR61CW User Manual
RCA RS252KM User Manual
Pioneer SUPERTUNERD DEH P5200HD User Manual
Philips FW R88FW R88 User Manual
Nokia 9351609 User Manual